*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 74622 ***



Transcriber’s Note

Hyphenations have been standardised.
Page 27 — changed way to away
Page 160 — changed paces to places
Pages 252 and Page 309 — Nordenskïold and
  Nordenskiöld, have been left spelt as is.




    THE LAST VOYAGE
    OF THE _KARLUK_


[Illustration: THE _KARLUK_ IN THE ICE-PACK

“The snow formed a blanket on the ice and later on its melting and
freezing cemented the ice snugly about the ship.” _See page 26_]




    THE LAST VOYAGE OF
    THE _KARLUK_

    _Flagship of Vilhjalmar Stefansson’s
    Canadian Arctic Expedition
    of 1913-16_

    AS RELATED BY HER MASTER,
    ROBERT A. BARTLETT, AND
    HERE SET DOWN BY RALPH T. HALE

    _Illustrated from
    charts and photographs_

    [Illustration]

    BOSTON
    SMALL, MAYNARD AND COMPANY
    PUBLISHERS


    Copyright, 1916
    BY SMALL, MAYNARD & COMPANY
    (INCORPORATED)

    Printers
    S. J. PARKHILL & CO., BOSTON, U.S.A.


  TO
  MRS. WILLIAM BARTLETT




CONTENTS


    CHAPTER                                      PAGE

    I THE EXPEDITION AND ITS OBJECTS               1

    II THE VOYAGE BEGINS                          10

    III WE MEET THE ICE AND GET A POLAR BEAR      16

    IV WE ARE FROZEN IN                           23

    V OUR WESTWARD DRIFT BEGINS                   29

    VI STEFANSSON’S DEPARTURE                     34

    VII DRIVEN BY THE STORM                       39

    VIII WE DRIFT AWAY FROM THE LAND              48

    IX IN WINTER QUARTERS                         59

    X THE ARCTIC NIGHT                            71

    XI THE SINKING OF THE _KARLUK_                83

    XII OUR HOME AT SHIPWRECK CAMP                93

    XIII WE BEGIN OUR SLEDGING                   105

    XIV THE SUN COMES BACK                       117

    XV THE RETURN OF MAMEN AND THE DEPARTURE
    OF THE DOCTOR’S PARTY                        124

    XVI OVER THE ICE TOWARDS WRANGELL ISLAND     137

    XVII THROUGH THE PRESSURE RIDGE              150

    XVIII WE LAND ON WRANGELL ISLAND             161

    XIX KATAKTOVICK AND I START FOR SIBERIA      171

    XX ACROSS THE MOVING ICE                     179

    XXI IN SIGHT OF LAND                         194

    XXII WE MEET THE CHUCKCHES                   207

    XXIII EASTWARD ALONG THE TUNDRA              220

    XXIV COLT                                    231

    XXV “MUSIC HATH CHARMS”                      242

    XXVI WE ARRIVE AT EAST CAPE                  253

    XXVII WITH BARON KLEIST TO EMMA HARBOR       264

    XXVIII IN TOUCH WITH THE WORLD AGAIN         280

    XXIX WAITING                                 285

    XXX OFF FOR WRANGELL ISLAND                  297

    XXXI THE RESCUE FROM WRANGELL ISLAND         311




LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS



    THE _KARLUK_ IN THE ICE-PACK       _See page 26_  _Frontispiece_

                                                  PAGE

 THE DRIFT OF THE _KARLUK_                           1

    THE _KARLUK_ IN HER WHALING DAYS                 4

    VILHJALMAR STEFANSSON                            8

    THE LEADERS AND THE SCIENTIFIC STAFF BEFORE
    THE DEPARTURE FROM NOME                         10

    STEFFANSSON AND HIS PARTY LEAVING THE _KARLUK_  36

    HAULING THE DREDGE                              48

    MAKING SOUNDINGS                                52

    THE SUPPLIES ON THE BIG FLOE                    56

    PAGES FROM CAPTAIN BARTLETT’S DIARY             92

    PLAN OF SHIPWRECK CAMP                          98

    CAPTAIN BARTLETT’S COPY OF THE “RUBÁIYÁT” OF
    OMAR KHAYYAM                                   102

    THE ICE-PACK                                   106

    LETTER FROM THE DOCTOR’S PARTY TO CAPTAIN
    BARTLETT                                       128

    MUGPI                                          142

    SHIPWRECK CAMP                                 144

    ANOTHER VIEW OF SHIPWRECK CAMP                 148

    MAP OF WRANGELL ISLAND                         162

    FIVE OF THE MEN OF THE _KARLUK_ ON WRANGELL
    ISLAND                                         180

    CAPTAIN BARTLETT’S CHART OF THE ALASKAN COAST  204

    CAPTAIN BARTLETT’S CHART OF THE SIBERIAN COAST 214

    THE NEWS OF CAPTAIN BARTLETT’S ARRIVAL AT
      ST. MICHAEL’S REACHES NOME                   282

    THE CAMP AT RODGERS HARBOR, WRANGELL ISLAND    306

    THE RESCUE OF THE PARTY AT WARING POINT,
      WRANGELL ISLAND                              314

    MAKING THE KAYAK ON WRANGELL ISLAND            320

    THE _KARLUK_ SURVIVORS ON BOARD THE _BEAR_     324




  THE LAST VOYAGE
  OF THE _KARLUK_

[Illustration: THE DRIFT OF THE _KARLUK_]




CHAPTER I

THE EXPEDITION AND ITS OBJECTS


We did not all come back.

Fifteen months after the _Karluk_, flagship of Vilhjalmar Stefansson’s
Canadian Arctic Expedition, steamed out of the navy yard at Esquimault,
British Columbia, the United States revenue cutter, _Bear_, that
perennial Good Samaritan of the Arctic, which thirty years before had
been one of the ships to rescue the survivors of the Greely Expedition
from Cape Sabine, brought nine of us back again to Esquimault—nine
white men out of the twenty, who, with two Eskimo men, an Eskimo woman
and her two little girls—and a black cat—comprised the ship’s company
when she began her westward drift along the northern coast of Alaska
on the twenty-third of September, 1913. Years of sealing in the waters
about Newfoundland and of Arctic voyaging and ice-travel with Peary
had given me a variety of experience to fall back upon by way of
comparison; the events of those fifteen months, I must say, justified
the prophecy that I made in a letter to a Boston friend, just before
we left Esquimault: “This will have the North Pole trip ‘beaten to a
frazzle.’”

It did; and there were two main reasons why.

One was that the _Karluk_, though an old-time whaler, was not built,
as the _Roosevelt_ was, especially for withstanding ice-pressure; very
few ships are. Dr. Nansen’s ship, the _Fram_, was built for the purpose
and has had a glorious record in both the Arctic and the Antarctic. The
_Karluk_, a brigantine of 247 tons, 126 feet long, 23 feet in beam,
drawing 16-1/2 feet when loaded, was built in Oregon originally to be a
tender for the salmon-fisheries of the Aleutian Islands. Her duty had
been to go around among the stations and pick up fish for the larger
ships. The word _karluk_, in fact, is Aleut for _fish_. When later in
her career she was put into the whaling service her bow and sides were
sheathed with two-inch Australian ironwood but she had neither the
strength to sustain ice-pressure nor the engine-power to force her way
through loose ice. She had had, however, an honorable career in the now
virtually departed industry of Arctic whaling, and was personally and
pleasantly known to Stefansson, who had travelled on her from place
to place along the Alaskan coast on several occasions during his
expeditions of 1906-7 and 1908-12.

The other reason was that the winter of 1913-14 was unprecedented in
the annals of northern Alaska. It came on unusually early, as we were
presently to learn, and for severity of storm and cold had not its
equal on record.

The National Geographic Society had originally planned to finance our
expedition, and it was only at the urgent request of the Canadian
premier, the Right Hon. R. L. Borden, that the Society relinquished its
direction of the enterprise. The Canadian Government felt that since
the country to be explored was Canadian territory it was only fitting
that the expedition fly its flag and be financed from its treasury.

When I returned from the seal-fisheries to Brigus, my old home in
Newfoundland, in the spring of 1918, I found awaiting me a telegram
from Stefansson, asking me to join his expedition and take charge of
the _Karluk_. I went at once to New York, then to Ottawa for a day with
the government authorities and direct from there to Victoria, B. C. It
was the middle of May and there was work to be done to get the ship
ready to sail in June.

It was an elaborate expedition, one of the largest and most completely
equipped, I believe, that have ever gone into the Arctic. It differed,
too, in one other respect than that of size, from previous Arctic
expeditions, in that its main objects were essentially practical,—in
fact, one might say, commercial. It was in two divisions. The northern
party, under Stefansson himself, was primarily to investigate the
theory so ably advanced by Dr. R. A. Harris of the United States Coast
and Geodetic Survey that new land—perhaps a new continent—was to be
found north of Beaufort Sea, which is that part of the Arctic Ocean
immediately to the north of Alaska. “The main work of the party aboard
the _Karluk_”—to quote Stefansson—“was to be the exploration of the
region lying west of the Parry Islands and especially that portion
lying west and northwest from Prince Patrick Island. The _Karluk_ was
to sail north approximately along the 141st meridian until her progress
was interfered with either by ice or by the discovery of land. If
land were discovered a base was to be established upon it, but if the
obstruction turned out to be ice an effort was to be made to follow the
edge eastward with the view of making a base for the first year’s work
near the southwest corner of Prince Patrick Island, or, failing that,
on the west coast of Banks Island.” The _Karluk_ was to go first to
Herschel Island, the old rendezvous of the Arctic whaling fleet and the
northernmost station of the Canadian Mounted Police. If she should
be beset in the ice and forced to drift, it was expected that certain
theories about the direction of Arctic currents would be tested, and
there would also be opportunity for dredging and sounding.

[Illustration: THE _KARLUK_ IN HER WHALING DAYS]

Both of these main objects were accomplished: Stefansson ultimately
found new land and the _Karluk_ engaged in an Arctic drift, but neither
result was attained in quite the way which was planned when we were
getting the ship ready in May and June, 1913. We returned—some of
us—rather earlier than we had expected, for we were prepared to be
away until September, 1916, and contrary to one of the theories of
Arctic currents we did not drift across the Pole to the Greenland
shore. Before we started some of the newspaper accounts of the
expedition said that the ship might be crushed in the ice; the
newspapers are more often correct than they are supposed to be.

Travelling to Herschel Island on the _Mary Sachs_ and the _Alaska_,
small schooners equipped with gasolene engines, the southern party,
under Dr. R. M. Anderson, who had been Stefansson’s only white
companion on his previous expeditions, was to map the islands already
discovered east of the mouth of the Mackenzie River; to make a
collection of the Arctic flora and fauna; to survey the channels among
the islands, in the hope of establishing trade-routes; to make a
geological survey of the coast from Cape Parry to Kent Peninsula and of
Victoria Island north and east of Prince Albert Sound, with the primary
object of investigating copper-bearing formations; and to study still
further the blond Eskimo who had been discovered by Stefansson in 1910.

Peary’s attainment of the North Pole in 1909, the goal of three
centuries of struggle, enabled the world to give attention to problems
unrelated to polar discovery and afforded men an opportunity to realize
not only that a million square miles in the Arctic still remained
marked on the maps as “unexplored territory,” but also that a great
deal remained to be done in regions which already had technically been
“discovered.” Stefansson himself had already proved this. The shores
of Dolphin and Union Straits, for instance, had been mapped by Dr.
John Richardson as far back as 1826, yet Stefansson, when he found the
blond Eskimo there in 1910, was the first white man on record who had
ever visited that tribe in all its history. After his return from that
remarkable expedition, I had made his acquaintance at a dinner in New
York, some time previous to the planning of the expedition of 1913-16,
and admired him for his scientific achievements and for his skill
and daring in living so long off the country in his many months of
exploration in the territory east of the Mackenzie River.

The scientific staff gathered for the expedition was large and
well-equipped. Besides Stefansson, anthropologist, and Dr. Anderson,
zoologist, it included twelve men who were all specialists. The
Canadian Geological Survey detailed four men to our party: George
Malloch, an expert on coal deposits and stratiography, who had been
a graduate student at Yale; J. J. O’Neill, a mining geologist, whose
specialty was copper; and Kenneth Chipman and J. R. Cox, skillful
topographers. For studying ocean currents and tides and the treasures
that might be brought up from the bottom of the sea we had James
Murray of Glasgow, oceanographer, who had worked for many years with
the late Sir John Murray, one of the world’s greatest authorities on
the ocean. Murray had been with Sir Ernest Shackleton on his Antartic
expedition and afterwards had been biologist of the boundary survey
of Colombia, South America. To study the fish of the Arctic Ocean we
had Fritz Johansen, who had been marine zoologist with Mylius Erichsen
in East Greenland and had done scientific work for the Department
of Agriculture at Washington. As forester we had Bjärne Mamen, from
Christiania, Norway, who had been on a trip to Spitsbergen and had
done work in the timber-lands of British Columbia. As the study of the
Eskimo was one of the most interesting objects of the expeditions we
quite naturally had two anthropologists besides Stefansson, one, Dr.
Henri Beuchat of Paris, the other, Dr. D. Jenness, an Oxford Rhodes
Scholar, from New Zealand. The magnetician was William Laird McKinlay,
a graduate of the University of Glasgow, who had been studying in the
Canadian Meteorological Observatory in Toronto. The photographer was
George H. Wilkins, a New Zealander, who had been a photographer in the
Balkan War and possessed mechanical ability. He had a motion-picture
apparatus as well as other cameras. In medical charge of the expedition
was Dr. Alister Forbes Mackay, who had served in the British navy after
his graduation from the University of Edinburgh, and, like Murray, had
accompanied Shackleton into the Antarctic. Five of these twelve men, as
shall be related, were to lay down their lives in the cause of science
during the coming year.

The crew consisted of the following: R. A. Bartlett, master;
Alexander Anderson, first officer; Charles Barker, second officer;
John Munro, chief engineer; Robert J. Williamson, second engineer;
Robert Templeman, steward; Ernest F. Chafe, messroom boy; John Brady,
S. Stanley Morris, A. King and H. Williams, able seamen; and F.
W. Maurer and G. Breddy, firemen. Six of these men—good men and
true—were starting on their last voyage. One other member of the crew
was added in Alaska,—John Hadley, who signed on as carpenter.

[Illustration:

 _Photograph copyrighted, 1914, by Lomen Bros., Alaska_

VILHJALMAR STEFANSSON]

By June 16 we had the _Karluk_ outfitted and were ready to leave our
berth at the Esquimault Navy Yard. Official photographs were taken and
a luncheon was given in Victoria at which Sir Richard McBride, the
Premier of British Columbia, on behalf of the people of the province,
presented Stefansson with a silver plate, suitably engraved. Stefansson
replied and Dr. Anderson and I were also called upon. Later the mayor
and aldermen of Victoria visited the _Karluk_ and presented us with a
set of flags to use when new lands were found.




CHAPTER II

THE VOYAGE BEGINS


On June 17, cheered on our way by the good wishes of the people among
whom we had spent a pleasant month, we left Esquimault for Nome. The
trip north was a memorable one for me, for I had never been up the
Alaskan coast before and enjoyed the beautiful scenery. We reached Nome
July 7 and remained there until the thirteenth, taking on supplies that
had come up on the mail-boat _Victoria_ from Seattle and transferring
supplies from the _Karluk_ to the dock for the two other ships of our
little fleet.

[Illustration:

  Wilkins      Malloch      Beuchat      O’Neill      Cox      McKinlay
  Mamen      McConnell      Jenness
  Chipman
  Mackay      Bartlett      Stefansson      Anderson      Murray      Johansen

THE LEADERS AND THE SCIENTIFIC STAFF BEFORE THE DEPARTURE FROM NOME]

On July 13, with a farewell salute from the _Bear_, which happened
to be in port at the time, we left Nome for Port Clarence, which we
reached the next day. All hands immediately set to work getting things
in readiness for our voyage into the Arctic Ocean. We blew down the
boiler, overhauled the engines, took on fresh water and rearranged
our stores and equipment, so that we might know where everything was
to be found. The weather was very variable, usually good but very
windy at times, with occasional showers. Some of the scientific
staff went ashore and cut grass for use in our boots later on; when a
man is wearing the deerskin boots so essential in Arctic work, it is
necessary for him to line the bottom with dry grass to act as a cushion
for his feet as he walks over the rough sea ice and also to absorb the
perspiration, for otherwise his feet would be in constant danger of
freezing.

By July 27 we were at last ready to start. Some further repairs were
still to be made on the _Alaska_ so she remained behind but at three
o’clock in the morning we weighed anchor and, accompanied by the _Mary
Sachs_, proceeded to sea. Besides the officers and crew we had on
board the _Karluk_, Stefansson and his secretary, Burt McConnell, with
Murray, Mamen, Malloch, Jenness, Beuchat, McKinlay and Dr. Mackay. We
had also a white dog-driver who left us at Point Barrow.

As we were steaming along in the forenoon, about a mile and a half
offshore, abreast of Tin City, I saw a rowboat coming towards us,
making signals to attract our attention. We altered our course to meet
her and when she came alongside we found that she had brought us a
message for Stefansson, which had been telephoned from Teller to Tin
City. It proved to be from an aviator named Fowler who was then at
Teller with his aeroplane; he asked permission to bring his machine on
board the _Karluk_, accompany us for a while and later on fly from the
ship to the shore. The _Karluk’s_ deck was already pretty well crowded
with dogs, sledges, sacks of coal and other gear, and Stefansson
finally decided that it would be impossible to grant the request.

About two o’clock in the afternoon we had Cape Prince of Wales a-beam
on the starboard side and shaped our course to round the shoal off
the cape. There was a strong westerly wind blowing. By this time the
_Mary Sachs_ was hull down astern, so we put about and went back to
see if everything was all right with her. When we left Port Clarence
we had put Wilkins on board the _Sachs_ to run her engine, on account
of the temporary disability of her own engineer and now, as we came
near enough to exchange words, we found that the engineer was feeling
well enough to perform his duties, so we lowered a boat and transferred
Wilkins to the _Karluk_ again.

With the _Sachs_ keeping in shore we proceeded on our way. The wind
began to blow harder and veered to the northwest, bringing in a dense
fog and a rising sea and making it necessary to put the ship on the
starboard tack, reaching towards the Siberian coast. We continued on
this course the rest of the day and until well after midnight; then the
wind veered round to the west again and the sea moderated, but the fog
continued. At 2 A. M. on the twenty-eighth our steering-gear gave out
but fortunately we soon had it repaired. At eight o’clock we reefed her
and headed towards the American shore. The fog still hung low and thick
but there were occasional gleams of sunshine. We were now steaming
through Bering Strait, across the Arctic Circle, and had twenty-four
hours of daylight.

Finally, at four o’clock on the morning of July 30, the fog began
to lift and by eleven it was fine and clear again, with a strong
north-northeast wind. The _Sachs_ was nowhere to be seen; in fact the
_Karluk_ did not see her again. We were now close to Cape Thompson,
steaming towards Point Hope. At ten o’clock in the evening we dropped
anchor off Point Hope, near the Eskimo village. The Eskimo in their
skin-boats and whaleboats came out to meet us, to trade dogs, boats,
furs and sealskins. About midnight we moved nearer to the land, and
early in the morning Stefansson went ashore to continue the trading
and make arrangements for the services of Panyurak and Asatshak, two
Eskimo boys eighteen or twenty years old, who also went by the names
of Jerry and Jimmy and were good dog-drivers and hunters. Stefansson
had lived so many years with the Eskimo of Alaska and the Mackenzie
River region, that he knew them personally, men, women and children,
from Point Barrow east along the northern coast, as well as I knew
the Eskimo of Whale Sound on the Greenland coast, that little tribe
of Arctic Highlanders, numbering only about two hundred and forty,
from whom we chose the Eskimo that accompanied us on the _Roosevelt_
to Cape Sheridan and played so important a part in the attainment of
the North Pole. Later in the morning of the thirty-first, we weighed
anchor and steamed around to the north side of Point Hope, where we
did more trading, and then proceeded on our way up the coast. By noon
we had Cape Lisburne a-beam and shaped our course for Icy Cape, to go
about ten miles outside of Blossom Shoals, a dangerous reef off Blossom
Point, which has always been dreaded by mariners. Our scientists were
busily engaged in writing letters, to be mailed at Point Barrow and
taken back on the _Bear_ which calls there once a year, usually in
August.

Thus far our progress all along had been satisfactory. Early on the
morning of August 1, however, we began to note indications of the
presence of ice on our weather side. The water began to get smoother,
and when we tested its temperature by hauling up a bucketful at
intervals, as the day wore on, we found it dropping steadily, until it
reached thirty-nine degrees; the water changed color, too, becoming
dirtier. Finally in the afternoon we could see the ice plainly on our
port bow. We had seen the “ice-blink” for some time before; now the
ice itself hove in sight about two miles away, with some larger pieces
scattered here and there among the floes. I learned afterwards that
up to a few days before we should have had clear water all the way to
Point Barrow. The ice curved in towards the shore, so that we had to
change our course; we had been steaming parallel with the land but now
we had to head towards shore or else run the danger of being caught
in the ice. About midnight our progress was still further barred and
we had to turn around and steam back to windward for a mile or so to
keep in the open water, for the strong north wind was driving the ice
towards the land. The next day the wind changed and blew off the land;
this started the ice off shore and we were able to move eastward, but
soon the offshore breeze died down and we had to turn back again.
Finally in the afternoon we made another attempt, with some success; we
were gradually nearing Point Barrow.




CHAPTER III

WE MEET THE ICE AND GET A POLAR BEAR


While we were steaming along off Point Belcher, about seventy-five
miles to the southwest of Point Barrow, I was in the crow’s nest, which
on the _Karluk_ was situated at the foretopgallant-mast, conning the
ship through the broken ice, when through my binoculars I saw a polar
bear about three miles away on the level floe. This was a welcome
sight, for the meat would be an addition to our current food supply and
the hide useful in several ways. There was no wind, so the bear did
not scent us. At first we could not go towards him because the ice was
too closely packed,—in fact at times we had to steam away from him to
follow the open lanes of water—but finally we managed to get headed in
the right direction. When we got within a few hundred yards of him he
spied us and promptly went into the water. That was just what I wanted;
if he had stayed on the ice he would probably have started to run and
as he could run much faster than the ship could steam he would probably
have got away from us.

With the bear in the water I now worked the ship to keep between him
and the ice and as polar bears, though they are good swimmers, do not
often dive, I knew that with ordinary luck we should get him. Shouting
to the mate to keep an eye on him I ran down the rope-ladder from the
barrel and rushed forward to the forecastle-head with a Winchester in
my hand. Some of the other members of the expedition, too, hearing the
word bear, grabbed their rifles and blazed away at him. Every one was
pretty much excited and for a few moments the bear seemed possessed of
a charmed life. At last my second shot hit him in the back and my third
in the head. This finished him; he keeled over and floated. We lowered
a boat, towed the bear to the side and hoisted him on board; then the
Eskimo skinned him. He was old and, as he had on his summer coat, his
hair was sparse and yellow and of no great value. The Eskimo cut up the
meat for dog food; we should have used it ourselves if we had not just
obtained a large supply of fresh meat at Nome and Port Clarence.

The skin of this old bear had something of a history. The Eskimo
stretched it on a frame and hung it up in the rigging for the wind and
sun to cure it. I had a pair of trousers made from the softest part
of the skin, which later I gave to Malloch. From the remainder I had
a sleeping-robe made which I used on the ice from the time the ship
sank until I reached the coast of Siberia. There I traded it for a
deerskin which I afterwards gave to a native at East Cape. The skin of
the polar bear makes the best sleeping-robe for Arctic use and the skin
of a young bear is also the best for trousers, because it will wear the
longest and, furthermore, the hair will not fall out, in spite of the
brushing and pounding you have to give it to get rid of the snow that
will cling to it after the day’s march.

Some time after we got this bear, I saw another one from the crow’s
nest. We were going away from him, however, and getting along pretty
well, so I hardly felt it wise to stop for him. Occasionally we saw
walrus asleep on the ice.

August 3 the wind again veered to the southwest, pushing the ice on
shore and jamming the ship in it so that we were unable to make any
progress. We were about four miles off the Seahorse Islands. Here we
found a current running to the eastward parallel with the shore and we
began to drift with this current in an easterly direction which was the
way we wanted to go. By eleven o’clock we had reached a point about two
miles from shore and twenty-five miles southwest of Point Barrow.

The early presence of ice on this coast convinced us that all was
not to be plain sailing on our voyage to Herschel Island and that it
behooved us to save every hour possible. With this in mind, Stefansson
now decided to go ashore and make his way to Point Barrow on foot. He
would need at least a day there to obtain furs for our use and he could
have his work all done by the time we reached there. Accordingly, at
eleven o’clock, he took the doctor and a couple of Eskimo, with a dog
sledge, and went ashore over the ice, the Eskimo and the dog-sledge
returning late in the afternoon. It was summer and there was no snow
or ice on the land so by walking all night in the continuous August
daylight, Stefansson and the doctor reached Point Barrow in the morning.

By the sixth, usually drifting only a few miles a day but occasionally
getting clear of the ice for a while to go ahead under our own power,
we had reached a point about a mile from shore off Cape Smythe,
which is only a few miles from Point Barrow. At midnight Stefansson
returned from Point Barrow, bringing with him some new members of
the expedition: an Eskimo family of five, consisting of Kerdrillo or
Kuralluk, a man about thirty-five years old, his wife Keruk, about
twenty-eight, and their children, a girl of seven who went by the name
of Helen and a baby called Mugpi not much over a year old; an Eskimo
named Kataktovick, between eighteen and twenty years old, who was
already a widower, with a baby girl whom he had left with his mother;
and John Hadley, a man between fifty-five and sixty years old, who for
a long time had been in charge of the whaling station at Cape Smythe
owned by Mr. Charles Brower, the proprietor of the store at Point
Barrow. Mr. Hadley had resigned his position to go east to Banks Land
and establish a trading-station of his own, chiefly to get foxskins
by barter with the Eskimo. As we were on our way to Herschel Island,
now was Mr. Hadley’s chance to get to his destination, for at Herschel
Island he could be transferred to the _Mary Sachs_ or the _Alaska_,
when they reached there, and so go east in the direction of Banks
Land with the southern party in the sequel Mr. Hadley, who, as I have
already mentioned was put on the ship’s articles as carpenter, proved a
very valuable addition to the party, but he did not get to Banks Land.

While we were at Cape Smythe, the white dog-driver who had accompanied
us from Port Clarence asked for his discharge and went on shore. We
sent our mail ashore to be taken to Point Barrow. As a result of our
trading with the Eskimo here we obtained altogether three skin-boats,
two kayaks and a number of sealskins for boot-soles. The Eskimo
Kerdrillo brought his three dogs to add to our own.

There is a wide difference between the skin-boat and the kayak. The
former is shaped not unlike an ordinary rowboat and is large enough
to hold from ten to twenty persons. Over the framework are stretched
sealskins, sewed together with deer sinew, which makes the boat
water-tight. The skin-boat will stand a lot of wear and tear. The
kayak, on the other hand, is small, pointed at both ends and completely
covered over except for an opening in the middle, where the single
occupant sits. The kayak is used for hunting and as it is small and
light can be easily placed on a sledge and drawn over the ice.

During the early morning of August 7 the ice began to move us eastward
around Point Barrow, where we met a current from the southeast and
began to drift towards the northwest, until by the next day we were
ten miles from land. We were still unable to use our engines and the
ice was closely packed, though it had been smashed and pounded by its
constant impact against the grounded floe along the shore. While we
were still jammed in the ice we took the opportunity of filling up our
tanks from a big floe not far away on which there was a lake of fresh
water where the sun and the rain had melted the ice.

Early on the ninth we got clear of the ice at last and steamed eastward
along the shore, free for the first time for many days. The ice was
closely packed outside of us but near shore there was open water
and we had little difficulty in making our way along. Navigation was
precarious on account of shallow water, but we used the hand lead-line
constantly. On the tenth while rounding a point of ice we got aground
for two hours, but the use of the anchors and engines enabled us to
back off into deep water again. The bottom was soft with the silt
carried down the rivers in the spring freshets and the ship sustained
no damage. We now made pretty steady progress to the eastward, though
the ice constantly threatened our path, and by the eleventh had reached
Cross Island, about half way from Point Barrow to Herschel Island.




CHAPTER IV

WE ARE FROZEN IN


It was clear by this time that there would be no chance this year to
reach new lands to the north by direct voyaging and that we should be
lucky if we succeeded in winning our way through to Herschel Island
before the ice closed in for the winter. By the afternoon of the
eleventh we managed to get as far east as Lion Reef. Here we tied on
to a grounded floe to hold our gain and take advantage of our next
chance to go east. Between Lion Reef and the mainland a few miles away
ran a current which set the ice moving smartly in all directions, but
unfortunately we drew too much water to venture into those shallow
lanes.

I took the opportunity afforded by our pause to examine the stem of
the ship and found that by contact with the ice two of the brass
stem-plates were gone and several bolts loosened in those that remained.

Whenever we were stationary in the ice, Murray, the oceanographer,
would use his dredge. He had been doing this in fact all along the
coast, ever since we were off Blossom Shoals. At this time he used a
dredge which he had brought with him; later on he used dredges made by
our engineers.

The dredge consisted of a rectangular frame, two feet by three, made of
four iron rods two inches wide by half an inch thick, welded together
at the corners, with a bag about two feet deep securely fastened to
this framework. The bag was made of cotton twine in a two-and-a-half
inch mesh; it narrowed towards the bottom. Sometimes cheese-cloth was
placed inside the bag to catch the animalculæ. A rope was fastened to
the middle of one side of the framework so that, when lowered to the
bottom of the sea, the framework would maintain an upright position,
with the bag extended out behind it.

When Murray got ready to use the dredge he would get over the rail of
the ship, which was only four feet above the surface of the ice, go
to the edge of a lead and find out the depth of the water by the hand
lead-line; then he would lower the dredge, put the rope on his back and
walk along the edge of the lead, dragging the dredge behind him. He
could handle it alone up to a depth of twenty fathoms; beyond that he
had to have help, which we all of us gladly gave. I do not believe that
dredging was ever done in that part of the Arctic before. Before we got
through we had brought up a good many specimens which were entirely
unknown to Murray, and others, such as coral, which we had hardly
expected to find in that neighborhood.

While we were tied up off Lion Reef, I sent out a boat to make
soundings; the report was so promising that we started on our way
again, on the morning of August 12, steaming through the loose ice
and keeping as near shore as possible. The ice moved according to
the direction and velocity of the wind, to which its irregularities
afforded plenty of sail-like surfaces. The wind had been northwest,
keeping the ice packed towards shore; it now veered round to the
southwest and loosened the ice to the northeast, outside of the reef.
We steamed along through the open water and because the ice near the
shore was closely packed, we were driven farther off shore than I
liked. We had to follow the open lanes, however, and go where they led.

About eight P. M. we were stopped by a large, unbroken sheet of ice.
This was very similar to the ice which I have seen in Melville Bay on
the west Greenland coast; it was part of the past season’s ice. Seldom
over a foot thick, it was honeycombed with water-holes; the _Roosevelt_
could have ploughed her way through it but the _Karluk_ was powerless
to do so.

We were now half way across Camden Bay, about fifteen miles west of
Manning Point, about where Collinson, in the _Enterprise_, had spent
the winter of 1853-4. We had come about 225 miles from Point Barrow,
considerably more than half the distance to Herschel Island. It seemed
at the moment as if we should be able to get through for the rest of
the way. As events proved, however, this was our farthest east, for
the next day, August 13, the open water closed up astern, the ice came
together all around us and held the ship fast. There was scarcely any
wind and consequently no movement of the ice.

The next day conditions remained the same. We tried to force our way
towards the land but failed and could do nothing but wait. For several
days there came no appreciable change either in weather or in our
position until on the eighteenth we had a heavy snowstorm all day,
which was just what was needed to make assurance doubly sure; the snow
formed a blanket on the ice and later on its melting and freezing
cemented the ice snugly about the ship so that she was made almost an
integral part of the floe itself. The weather was perfectly calm but
so dull and hazy that for several days we could not see the shore.
Finally on the twenty-first we had a fine, clear day and about thirty
miles south of where we lay, could see the snow-capped summits of
the Romanzoff and Franklin Mountains, the northernmost range of the
Rockies, the backbone of the continent.

There was very little alteration in the ship’s position until August
26 when, with a light north wind, the ice moved a few miles to the
westward, carrying us with it. The next day we had a heavy snowstorm
with wind from the east and we moved still farther west; the next day
we drifted westward again, and the next and the next, and for a good
many days, sometimes a knot an hour, sometimes faster, parallel to the
land but six or seven miles away from it. At times we could see lanes
of open water, but they were always too far away for us to reach with
our imprisoned vessel. Yet nearer the land the water was open and, so
far as we could tell from where we were, no ship would have experienced
much difficulty in making her way along there in either direction.
If we had used all our dynamite we could have broken a pathway for
about a quarter of a mile but no farther and, as the open water was
much farther away than that, there was obviously no use in trying the
experiment.

Meanwhile, by August 22, Stefansson had decided to send Beuchat and
Jenness ashore, to make their way eastward and join the southern
party in the event of our not getting any nearer Herschel Island. In
fact, besides the two anthropologists, McKinlay and Wilkins, also,
could properly be regarded as passengers aboard the _Karluk_; their
apparatus, however, was too heavy for safe transportation to the shore
over the ice as it then was, loose and shifting.

All hands busied themselves in getting Beuchat and Jenness ready for
their journey. On account of the precarious nature of the young ice,
however, which was making in the leads towards the land and between the
older floes but was not yet altogether dependable, the start was not
made until the twenty-ninth. They got away about eleven A. M. with one
sledge and seven dogs and a supporting party consisting of Wilkins,
McConnell and the doctor and three Eskimo, two of whom were to return
to the ship with the sledge and dogs and the supporting party. On the
sledge they carried a skin-boat in which Beuchat and Jenness might
proceed to Herschel Island, where they would find plenty of food,
whether the _Mary Sachs_ and the _Alaska_ succeeded in reaching there
or not. The whole project went awry, however, because the party had
gone scarcely a mile and a half from the ship when the skin-boat was
damaged, as the sledge bumped along over the rough surface of the ice,
and when Stefansson went out to investigate he ordered the whole party
back to the ship again.




CHAPTER V

OUR WESTWARD DRIFT BEGINS


The problem of laying in an adequate supply of fresh meat for the
winter, for our dogs and ourselves, was now beginning to be a serious
one. Long before this we had expected to be at Herschel Island but
now with a fairly steady drift in the opposite direction it was
evident that we should hardly be able to go the rest of the way
before the ice broke up the next summer. This meant a whole year’s
delay in carrying out the purposes of the expedition, all on account
of the unexpectedly early setting in of winter, and it meant, too,
the unforeseen question of a winter’s supply of fresh meat for the
thirty-one human beings—twenty-four white men and seven Eskimo—now
on board the _Karluk_. Without fresh meat there was always danger of
scurvy, that blight of so many earlier Arctic explorers, which later
expeditions—notably those under Peary—had been able to avoid by
systematic killing of whatever game the country afforded for food.

Our four Eskimo men made daily trips to the open leads to shoot seal;
they were only moderately successful, for the seal seemed to be rather
scarce. Occasionally, too, we got a taste of duck-shooting as the birds
came flying along the open water on their way south for the winter.

On Thursday, September 11, Wilkins, Mamen and I went out to an open
lead after ducks. We took with us one of the three Peterborough canoes
which we were bringing along to be transferred to the southern party
at Herschel Island for use in navigating the small streams east of the
Mackenzie. Dragging the canoe on a sledge to the edge of the lead, we
made tea and had a little lunch, and then paddled up the lead in search
of ducks. As we went along, we saw several seal and shot one which sank
before we could get it.

Soon we saw the birds flying along the landward edge of the ice. We
crossed over and I climbed out of the canoe into a kind of natural
“blind” formed of the raftered ice, while Mamen and Wilkins paddled
along towards the bottom of the lead. They met a good deal of newly
formed ice, less than a quarter of an inch in thickness, which they had
to smash with their paddles as they went along. There were plenty of
birds near the bottom of the lead but the smashing of the ice disturbed
them so that Mamen and Wilkins had to turn back and paddle over in my
direction, picking out of the water as they came along a few ducks
that I had shot from my blind.

The wind had changed; the ice began to close up and thin ice began to
form in the smaller leads, so we had to paddle pretty fast to get out
into the open lead without being caught. It was a beautiful sunshiny
day and the surface of the water was so clear and smooth that, although
the ship was fully two miles away from us in the ice, her rigging
was reflected in our lead. We were getting sunsets now, with the
gradual shortening of the daylight; the sunset was red and brilliant
on this particular day, giving the white ice the lovely appearance of
rose-colored quartz. We hauled out the canoe, lashed it to the sledge
and left it there for another day’s shooting. Returning to the ship we
found that other members of the party, too, had brought in some ducks
so that among us we had about fifty birds, a good day’s work.

It was on such journeys as this that I first learned the use of the
ski. Mamen was from Norway and had been a famous ski-jumper in that
land of winter sports; he had won many prizes for his skill. I knew
that Nansen, on his Journey from the _Fram_ to his farthest north and
back to Franz Josef Land, had used ski and so had Amundsen on his
journey to the South Pole, but with Peary we had always used snowshoes
and I had never had a pair of ski on my feet. Mamen now persuaded me to
try skiing and a rare sport I found it. Not far from the ship we had a
ski-jump, made by filling in an ice-rafter about thirty feet high with
blocks of ice; we covered it with snow and then over all splashed water
which froze and made the surface very slippery. We would climb up the
back of the jump on the soft snow by side-stepping on our ski and then
coast down the front. Mamen showed me how to do the telemark swing.

We would walk out to the water-holes on ski, with a shotgun apiece,
in search of ducks. For several days we had no luck because many of
the water-holes where the birds were in the habit of resting in their
flight were frozen over. Finally on the fifteenth we went out again and
did somewhat better. When we shot any birds, however, the young ice
that formed in the leads made it difficult to get them. We would then
break off a piece of ice large enough and thick enough to hold us and,
standing on it as on a raft, push along with our ski-poles and work
around to pick up the birds. The ice we pushed through was perhaps a
quarter of an inch thick, and we would break it ahead as we went along.

Salt water does not freeze so easily as fresh water, on account of
the salt, but when it does freeze the ice is much tougher and less
brittle than fresh-water ice. A man breaking through fresh-water ice
fractures a considerable surface; in the case of salt-water ice the
hole he makes is just large enough to let him through. Salt-water ice
bends and buckles but will still bear you when fresh-water ice of equal
thickness will break at once. Sometimes we would find the ice too heavy
to push through and once when this happened and we had to go back and
get a boat into the water we found that during our absence the gulls
had eaten the duck we had shot.

All this time, of course, we kept up the regular ship’s routine. The
darkness was coming earlier in the afternoon as the weeks went by and
by September 17 we had to light the lamp for our six o’clock supper.
Already, on the fourteenth, we had put the stove up in the cabin. The
days were usually cloudy and the engine-room and the galley-stove did
not supply quite enough heat to warm the cabin, though in our skiing
trips we found it still comfortable in rubber-boots, sweaters and
overalls.




CHAPTER VI

STEFANSSON’S DEPARTURE


For several days the ship had remained stationary,—that is, the ice
had shown no signs of movement, and the weather had been generally
calm. The Eskimo were becoming more successful in shooting seal for our
fresh meat supply, which we kept in a kind of natural refrigerator that
we had made by scooping out a hole in the ice not far from the ship.
With the ship now apparently securely fixed for the winter, however,
Stefansson came to the conclusion that it would be a good thing for
some one to go ashore and get game.

He talked the matter over with me at some length on September 18.
Kerdrillo was the only one of the Eskimo who had had any experience
at deer-hunting and he knew a good deal about the country to the
back of us. In fact he was more familiar with land hunting than with
ice-travel. I had shot plenty of caribou in Grant Land and Ellesmere
Land, as well as in Newfoundland and elsewhere, and volunteered to go,
but Stefansson was the only one on board who not only knew how to hunt
caribou but also was fully acquainted with the country. He had shot
caribou in 1908 and 1909 along the shore from Cape Halkett to Flaxman
Island and was not only familiar with all the fishing and trapping
places of the Eskimo, not to be easily found by a newcomer to the
region, but also knew every Eskimo there personally and might be able
to buy fish and meat from them. He might even get some of the Eskimo
families to join the expedition, the men as hunters and the women as
seamstresses to make fur clothing for the ship’s company to wear during
the winter which was now upon us. He had heard at Point Barrow that
the carcasses of two whales had come ashore at Harrison Bay; these
would make good food for our dogs. He decided, therefore, that the task
logically devolved upon him. Plans were accordingly made for him to go
ashore on the twentieth. We were off the mouth of the Colville River at
this time, having drifted half way back to Point Barrow since reaching
our farthest east the middle of August.

On the morning of the twentieth I was up early and got things together
for the shore party which, besides Stefansson, consisted of Jenness,
McConnell and Wilkins, the two Point Hope Eskimo, Jimmy and Jerry,
with two sledges and twelve dogs. For supplies they took two Burberry
tents, a stove with piping, two axes, a dozen candles, four gallons of
alcohol, a box of dog-biscuit, six tins of compressed tea-tablets, ten
pounds of sugar, a supply of matches, three sleeping-bags, sheepskin
sleeping-robes, two pieces of canvas for tents, four slabs of bacon,
ten pounds of lard, one hundred and twenty pounds of fish, twenty
pounds of rice, a box of tinned beef, five pounds of salt, a case of
Underwood man-pemmican (we had two kinds of pemmican, one for men,
the other for dogs, equally palatable and nourishing) fifteen pounds
of chocolate, a box of ship’s biscuits or “pilot bread,” a Mannlicher
rifle and a shotgun, with ammunition, six seal-floats and a camp
cooking-set.

We all had luncheon together as usual. There was nothing out of the
ordinary about the trip that was about to take place. Stefansson
expected to be back in about ten days and there seemed no reason to
suppose that the ship would not remain where she was until the next
summer brought a genuine smashing-up of the ice and freed her. We all
went out on the ice, however, to see the shore party off and Wilkins
took some moving pictures.

[Illustration:

  Stefansson

STEFANSSON AND HIS PARTY LEAVING THE _KARLUK_]

Before he started, Stefansson left me the following formal letter of
instruction:

  C. G. S. _Karluk_, Sept. 20, 1913.

  _Dear Captain Bartlett_:

 On the trip for which I am leaving the _Karluk_ to-day, I expect to
 make land on the largest second from the west of the Jones Islands
 (Thetis Island). If the ice is strong enough I expect to cross thence
 to near Beechey Point to hunt caribou; if feasible I may go on to
 the mouth of the Itkuilik River, known to the Eskimo as Itkilhkpe,
 to see if fish can be purchased there from the natives. Should the
 _Karluk_ during our absence be driven from her present position it
 will be well for you so soon as she has come to a stop again, and as
 soon as it appears safe to send a party ashore, to erect one or more
 beacons, giving information of the ship’s location. If she goes east,
 the beacons should be erected on accessible islands; if west they
 should be at Cape Halkett, Pitt Point, or Point Simpson, to facilitate
 the finding of the ship in fog or a blizzard by our party coming from
 shore or by hunters who are overtaken by thick weather while away from
 the ship. It will be well to have established four lines of beacons,
 running in the four cardinal directions from the ship to as great a
 distance as practicable. There should be some arrangement by which
 these beacons indicate in what direction the ship is from each of
 them. And some of them should have the distance of the ship marked
 upon them. These beacons need not be large, but should not be over 100
 yards apart to be of use in thick weather. Flags or other fluttering
 things should not be used, for bears might be scared away by them.
 On days when an on-shore wind is blowing it might be desirable that
 Dr. Mackay run lines of soundings out in various directions from
 the ship. If it becomes practicable send off Malloch and Mamen for
 surveying purposes. McKinlay should accompany them for the purpose of
 establishing magnetic stations in connection with Malloch’s survey,
 Malloch locating the stations for McKinlay so as to save unnecessary
 duplications of instruments.

 Except for some especial reason, the Eskimo woman Keruk should be kept
 sewing boots of the winter sea-ice type—deer legs, using ugsug soles.

 It is likely that we shall be back to the ship in ten days, if no
 accident happens.

  V. STEFANSSON.

Stefansson and his party got away at half past one in the afternoon
on September 20. The next day we began preparations for the departure
of Mamen and Malloch, to carry out Stefansson’s instructions, making
a tent on the sewing-machine and getting started on the fur clothing,
of which we had not made any up to this time. This was “tobacco day,”
which at this time came once a month, when the allowance of a pound per
man was given out, but which later on we changed to come around every
twenty-two days.

As the ship was stationary in the ice I suggested to Murray that this
would be a good time to rig up a tidal gauge; he took kindly to the
suggestion and made preparations to carry it out. The day before,
McKinlay had added to our equipment an anemometer for measuring the
velocity of the wind, putting it up aloft on the edge of the crow’s
nest, where the wind blew, if anywhere; the wires ran down the mast and
along the deck to McKinlay’s room where he had the indicator.




CHAPTER VII

DRIVEN BY THE STORM


All day long on both September 21 and 22, it was dull and cloudy and
the barometer was falling steadily, so I was not surprised at daylight
September 23 to find the wind blowing from the east forty miles an
hour. McKinlay’s anemometer was seeing active service at once. I
noticed that the Eskimo seemed very uneasy and made frequent visits
to the dredge-hole, where we were in the habit of using the hand
lead-line to detect movements of the ice; whenever the ice moved we
could feel the lead coming with us. After breakfast I began to visit
the dredge-hole myself more often than usual. At quarter of ten I was
there and felt no drift but at ten, while I had the line in my hand,
the lead started to go. Kerdrillo and Kataktovick were near me; handing
them the line I asked them what they thought; they instantly replied
that we were moving. Immediately I had everything that we had placed on
the ice taken aboard again, including the sledge and the canoe which we
had used in our duck-shooting, for it seemed likely that the ice would
eventually break up. Towards afternoon it began to snow and soon a
blizzard was in full blast.

On the twenty-fourth the storm moderated and the sun came out for a
short time. The temperature was mild and there was a good deal of water
to be seen to the northeast. The Eskimo resumed their hunting and
killed three seal. The rate of drift was about two miles an hour; this
increased somewhat in the afternoon, when the wind freshened. Sometimes
the ship would appear to be in a vast floating island of ice, with
water on every hand but too far away for us to reach even if we could
have made our way through the solid mass in which we were frozen.

The next day, September 25, the gale, which had sprung up again,
continued with unabated violence and the air was filled with snow. The
season was wearing on towards the time of unbroken darkness and there
were several hours now in the twenty-four when it was intensely dark.
The nights were moonless and starless, for the air was filled with
blinding snow.

All about us we could hear the ice tearing and grinding. The water
through which we were drifting was comparatively shallow and there
was danger not only from the great fragments of the floe, which
turned up and toppled over and over, but also, and chiefly, from the
heavier floes which occurred here and there and had protruding edges,
submerged and hidden, like the long, underwater arm that ripped the
side out of the _Titanic_. Every moment the _Karluk_ was in danger of
being tossed up on one of these heavy floes and left stranded, to break
up like a ship wrecked on a beach, or of being flung against the ice
bodily like a ship thrown by wind and waves against a cliff. At any
moment, too, the ice-floe might smash up and release her to the peril
of being crushed by the impact of the floating fragments. We all slept
with our clothes on—when we slept at all—and kept the boats loaded
with supplies, ready to be lowered at an instant’s notice.

The drift of the _Karluk_ was a much worse experience than the voyage
of the _Roosevelt_ through Kennedy Channel from Kane Basin into the
Arctic Ocean. The waters traversed by the _Roosevelt_ were, of course,
narrower than Beaufort Sea and they were filled with floating icebergs
and floe-ice, but there we had continuous daylight and could see what
we were doing and, also, knew definitely where we were headed, whereas
in the _Karluk_ we might drift in the ice even to destruction, unable
to do anything to save the ship. The _Roosevelt_, to be sure, as I
have said, was built for pushing through the broken ice but I very
much doubt whether, even she, once frozen in like the _Karluk_, would
have been able to extricate herself, and how much less effective was
the _Karluk_ with her weaker construction and less powerful engines.
As long as the ice remained frozen solidly about the ship, our chief
danger was from the heavy grounded floes; if it broke up, then the
fragments were more likely to be fatal to the _Karluk_ than they would
be to a ship built like the _Roosevelt_.

We were not far from land. In fact from the crow’s nest during the day
I caught a glimpse of what I took to be Cape Halkett. The next day
the storm subsided, conditions improved somewhat, though our drift
continued, and by the chart we were not far now from Point Barrow. The
hunters were able to go out and the Eskimo brought in three seal.

When we started our drift we had brought the dogs aboard to avoid
losing any, because the dogs, of course, were essential to our safety
if anything should happen to the ship; we now put them back again on
the ice. When aboard ship they were chained in all parts of the deck,
wherever we could find room for them, with a leeway of about two feet
for each. They had to be kept separate in this way so that they could
not get at each other, for when a fight started it was liable to be a
fight to a finish. There were about forty of them all told and when
they were on board they all barked constantly day and night.

I do not consider the Alaskan dog the equal of the dogs we had with us
on the North Pole trips with Peary. I don’t know whether contact with
civilization has caused them to deteriorate or not. It has certainly
had that effect on the Eskimo who, since the coming of the whalers and
traders, have not had to depend for their living on the country but
go to Point Barrow and the other stations and buy whatever they need,
exchanging pelts from the animals they shoot or trap. The dogs that
Stefansson took with him on his shore journey on September 20 were
obtained from one of the best dog-drivers in Nome. The best of the
remaining dogs were none of them so good as the worst of the dogs we
had on the North Pole trips. They required more food, could not stand
fatigue so well, though they were heavier than the North Greenland
dogs, and they were trained for land, not for ice, travel.

When I came to use them later on, I found that they were terrified by
the groaning and crushing of the ice and, when they were going over
new ice that buckled, they would become frightened and instead of
separating would all huddle together for mutual protection; perhaps
they were not to be blamed for this, for though it is all right if you
are used to it, the shifting ice can furnish the uninitiated with an
unlimited number of surprises. In such times of danger they would not
respond either to the voice or to the whip of the driver.

Driving Eskimo dogs is a hard job at best, for they seem possessed
of the spirit of Satan, himself, even the best of them. The North
Greenland Eskimo harness their dogs to the sledge fan-wise, each dog
having traces that fasten directly to the sledge itself, whereas
the Alaskan Eskimo harness the dogs to a long rope, at intervals on
either side. With both methods the dogs get the harness tangled again
and again and then, out of the range of the whip, they will sit down
and blink at the driver in a way calculated to make him feel like
committing cruelty to animals. They will all of them chew the harness
and free themselves if you give them half a chance.

We fed the dogs on the _Karluk_ on dried salmon which we obtained
at Nome, together with rice and oatmeal and Indian meal, all cooked
together. As long as we had steam on the main boiler we cooked the
dog-food by letting the steam blow through a hose leading into a pork
barrel filled with the ingredients. We always served the dogs with hot
food—and it was quite good enough for a man to eat—and after the
boiler was blown down we cooked it every night in the galley stove.
Mr. Hadley looked after feeding the dogs, and no better man could have
been found, for he understood not only how to feed them but also how
important it was to have them well cared for. Whenever possible we kept
the dogs on the ice, for the freedom was good for them. Even then, to
prevent their fighting, we often had to chain them up to raftered ice.

It is a mistake to think that Arctic weather is characterized by
unvarying cold; on the contrary it offers radical differences in
temperature from day to day, and the seasons differ greatly from year
to year. We were experiencing an extraordinarily early and severe
winter and yet for the next few days now the weather was frequently
mild and springlike, with temperatures above the freezing-point.
This does not mean that there was any sudden thaw; the snow fell at
intervals and the sky was overcast but the wind was not bitterly cold
as it became later on in our drifting.

We busied ourselves, as we had from the beginning of the drift, in
making preparations to leave the ship, an event which under the
circumstances was probable at any moment. The Eskimo woman, Keruk,
began making fur clothing for us. We put all the Jaeger underwear in
large canvas bags placed where they could be reached conveniently at
once. The whaleboats we provisioned each for eight persons for twenty
days and we put supplies for a couple of months on deck ready to be
thrown overboard. We fixed up the forward hold as a carpenter’s shop
for Mr. Hadley and he started in to make a Peary sledge.

This was the kind of sledge that I had been accustomed to use on the
ice on my various trips with Peary. He invented it himself, evolving
it from the experience of his years of Arctic work and, in several
important particulars, it was a marked improvement over the Eskimo
sledge. We did not have the material to make an exact duplicate but we
did the best we could.

The Peary sledge is thirteen feet long over all, with runners made
each of a single piece of hickory or ash, three inches wide by an
inch-and-a-half thick, bent up by steaming at each tip and shod the
whole length with a steel shoe, like the tire of a wheel. The bow has
a long, low rake and the stern turns up to make steering with the
upstanders true as the runners slide along. The filling-in pieces are
of oak, fastened with sealskin lashing, and the bed of the sledge
is made of boards of soft wood, lashed to the filling-in pieces. In
loading the Peary sledge we always put the bulk of the weight in the
middle and left each end light; with its long rake fore and aft the
sledge will swing as on a pivot, so that when you get into a position
where you cannot go ahead you can back the sledge or turn it around
and even go stern first if necessary, without lifting it. When, for
instance, you come suddenly to a crack in the ice, when travelling
with the Peary sledge, you can turn it around or steer it aside. Being
constructed with lashings instead of bolts, it is flexible and adapted
to the rough going over the sea ice, while in getting through young
ice, on account of its turned-up rear end it can be easily dragged back
on to firm ice with a rope.




CHAPTER VIII

WE DRIFT AWAY FROM THE LAND


The last day of September we got another glimpse of the land, seeing
distinctly the low shore of Cooper Island, with its Eskimo houses. We
were still to the eastward of Point Barrow, drifting slowly along in
the pack. Mamen, the doctor and I went out to a ski-jump we had built
and in trying a higher jump than usual I heeled over and, instead of
landing on my ski, came down with a hard bump on my side. I didn’t let
the doctor know how badly I was hurt because I didn’t want any one to
know that I could be such a duffer but I was unable to lift my hand to
comb my hair for several weeks.

October came in with a snowstorm and a strong northeast wind which
drove us fast before it. On the morning of the first there came a crack
in the ice about a foot wide, running east and west, two miles from
the ship. It was too far away for us to dynamite our way to it even if
it had been a likely lead for navigation and besides when you dynamite
ice you must have open water for the broken fragments to overflow into
or they will choke up around you and you are worse off than before.
The heavy wind did not allow this crack to remain open more than a few
hours.

[Illustration: HAULING THE DREDGE

“The dredging and soundings were both carried on through a hole in the
ice, which we had made at the stern of the ship.” _See page 49_]

On the second and again on the third we caught glimpses of the land.
On the third the same gale that destroyed part of the town of Nome
sent us bowling along to the northwest. Occasionally we saw open water
but it was always far away. The weather on the fourth and fifth was
delightful, with the temperature up in the forties, and on the fifth we
had a beautiful sunset. Mamen, Malloch and I went ski-jumping in the
bright sunshine and had a wonderful afternoon of it.

We were now fast drifting to the northwest, off Point Barrow, getting
outside the twenty-fathom curve. The farther north we drifted the
deeper the water was becoming and the more varied in yield, for we kept
up the dredging and now we began to get flora and fauna characteristic
of the deep sea, instead of the specimens peculiar to the waters near
shore. Our soundings were kept up constantly and showed that we were
sliding off the continental shelf, so to speak, into the ocean depths.
The dredging and soundings were both carried on through a hole in
the ice, which we had made at the stern of the ship. Here we had an
igloo—a snow-house—for protection.

Peary had given me the first stimulus to seek information in the
Arctic; he had been the first to make me feel the fascination of all
this sounding and dredging, mapping out the bed of the ocean, outlining
the continental shelf. These things and the search for new land in
latitudes where man has never set foot before are what appeal to me.
Call it love of adventure if you will; it seems to me the life that
ought to appeal to any man with red blood in his veins, for as long as
there is a square mile of the old earth’s surface that is unexplored,
man will want to seek out that spot and find out all about it and bring
back word of what he finds. Some people call the search for the North
Pole a sporting event; to me it represents the unconquerable aspiration
of mankind to attain an ideal. Our _Karluk_ drift and its possibilities
interested me keenly, for we were on the way to a vast region where
man had never been; we were learning things about ocean currents and
the influence of the winds and almost daily were bringing up strange
specimens from the bottom of the sea. And I felt sure that come what
might we would get back in safety to civilization.

For several days we continued our offshore drift without change,
bearing sometimes due north, sometimes easterly and then again
northwesterly until by the ninth we were about thirty-five miles from
Point Barrow and drifting fast, too fast, in fact, to use the dredge.
The depth of the water had by now increased to almost a hundred fathoms.

The afternoon of the ninth Mamen and I were out on our ski, when there
came a sudden crack in the ice between us and the ship. Fortunately
I was on the watch for just such an event and as soon as I saw the
black streak of the open water on the white surface of the ice about a
hundred yards away from the high rafter which formed our ski-jump, we
started for the lead at top speed. The crack was about ten feet wide
at first; the wind was blowing, the snow was falling fast and night
was closing in. We had a dog with us and she ran along ahead of us to
the lead. The edges of the ice at one point were only about three feet
apart and after a wait of five or ten minutes we managed to bridge the
gap and get across just in time, but the dog got on another section of
ice which broke away and floated off with her.

When I got back to the ship I threw off my heavy ski shoes and went up
into the crow’s nest. It was stormy and I could not see very far. The
crack in the ice was about half a mile away and, as I could see, was
closing up. When it closed I feared we should be in for trouble, for
the ice was three or four feet thick, and if it should break up all the
way down to the ship and get us mixed up in the floating fragments,
it might crush the ship in an instant. So I set everybody at work on
the jump. For some time we had been placing supplies overboard on a
heavy floe not far from the ship and there we already had supplies for
several months in case of emergency. When the crack closed up, the ice
about 150 yards astern split at right angles into a lane of open water
a couple of feet wide.

The thermometer was about zero and there was much condensation in
the air, indicating the proximity of a good deal of open water. We
had steam up and I decided that if conditions remained the same when
daylight came the next morning, so that we could see what we were
doing, I would try to get the ship out into the open water and back to
the land. I stayed up all night but the next morning I found that all
the leads had closed up and through the clear, frosty air no open water
was visible in any direction. This proved to be the nearest the open
water came to us in all our drift.

[Illustration: MAKING SOUNDINGS

“We got the Lucas sounding-machine together, and installed it on the
ice at the edge of the dredge hole. With this machine on October 11 we
got 1,000 fathoms.”]

The temperature now went down to fifteen below zero and our soundings
by the Kelvin sounding-machine gave us no bottom at 270 fathoms. We
bent on a reel of 350 fathoms more and got no bottom at 500 fathoms.
Then we got the Lucas sounding-machine together and installed it on the
ice at the edge of the dredge hole. With this machine, on October 11
we got 1000 fathoms.

The dog that had floated off the day before came back; this made me
happy, because dogs were valuable to us and this particular dog, whose
name was Molly, was going to have a litter of pups. All the dogs were
now put back on the ice again, for the leads had all closed up and the
danger appeared to be over for the present.

Our Eskimo seamstress, Keruk, was working industriously and by now
had completed her fifteenth pair of winter deerskin boots. These are
made from the leg and foot of reindeer that have been killed during
the later fall or winter when they have their winter coats on, cut up
into four or five strips which are all sewed together to form leggins,
the hairy part inside; the sole is made from the skin of the ugsug, or
bearded seal. Keruk worked on fur clothing also. She did the cutting
and much of the sewing; some of the men knew how to sew and they
helped, too.

We continued our general drift to the north-west until October 22, when
for a few days the wind shifted and sent us south and east before we
took up our westward drift again. We were then about twenty-five miles
south of where Keenan Land should have been, according to the map of
the Arctic Region prepared by Gilbert H. Grosvenor, director and editor
of the National Geographic Society, for Peary’s book “The North Pole,”
a copy of which we had in the ship’s library. We were near enough to
have seen Keenan Land with a telescope from the masthead, on a fine
clear day, but though we kept a constant lookout for it from the crow’s
nest, we saw no signs of it whatever.

All this time we continued to get a good many seal. Most of these were
shot by the Eskimo, whose skill at hunting of this kind far exceeded
that of any other members of the party. We needed the flesh for fresh
meat for ourselves and fed the skins and blubber to the dogs. The seal
is the one indispensable animal of the Arctic. Its flesh is by no means
disagreeable, though it has a general flavor of fish, which constitutes
the seal’s chief food.

We continued our preparations for an extended stay in the ice. The ship
was now some two feet lighter than she had been the middle of August
when first frozen in; we had burned a good deal of coal and had removed
coal, biscuit, beef, pemmican and numerous other things from the deck
and also from the hold, sledging them to the heavy floe of which I have
already spoken. This floe was about half an acre in size and about
thirty feet thick, of blue ice, amply able to stand a good deal of
knocking about before breaking up. We now cut the ship out of the ice
which was fast to her sides, so that she would ride up to her proper
level before freezing in again.

Whether we were to continue in the ice or get clear, it was well to
have a good supply of emergency stores safe on the ice, because with
any ship at sea there is always the danger of fire. When we got the
_Roosevelt_ to Cape Sheridan in 1905 and again in 1908 we unloaded her
at once and put the supplies on land, building a house of the unopened
biscuit boxes, so that if the ship should chance to get afire and burn
up completely we should simply have had to walk back to Etah with our
supplies and wait for our relief ship. This experience I now applied
to our situation on the _Karluk_. We had various coal-stoves on board,
one in the saloon, one in the scientists’ room, one in my room, with
fires in the galley and Mr. Hadley’s carpenter’s shop and of course in
the engine-room, while the Eskimo had blubber stoves of soapstone in
the quarters we had built for them on deck. Besides all these stoves
we had numerous lamps. To guard against the danger from fire we had
chemical fire extinguishers and about fifty blocks of snow, distributed
wherever there was room for them about the ship, and in the galley a
hundred-gallon tank with a fire kept going constantly under it to
keep the water from freezing. We had a fire-fighting corps, every man
of which knew what he must do in case of fire. If fire broke out, the
ship’s bell would be rung and everybody would seize a block of snow or
the fire extinguisher or the buckets near the water-tank, as his duty
required, and help extinguish the fire.

Our supplies on the big floe we left at first where we put them. Later
on as we got opportunity we built a regular house, with walls composed
of boxes and bags of coal, cases of biscuit, barrels and other large
articles, with lumber, of which we had put two thousand feet over
on the ice, for flooring, scantling for roof and an extra suit of
the ship’s sails to cover all. We banked it all around with snow for
warmth. There was a kind of vestibule of snowbanks and a canvas door so
weighted that it would fly to of itself. Later still, in addition to
this box-house, we built a large snow igloo.

On the fourteenth for the first time we discontinued the regular
nautical routine of watch and watch and instead had a night watchman
and a day watchman, all taking turns at the work.

[Illustration: THE SUPPLIES ON THE BIG FLOE

“Our supplies on the big floe we left at first where we put them. Later
on as we got opportunity we built a regular house, with walls composed
of boxes and bags of coal, cases of biscuit, barrels and other large
articles.”]

We had a new dredge by this time, a larger and better one, made by
Chief Engineer Munro, with a long line, for we were getting soundings
of 1200 fathoms. We brought up a brittle starfish on the sixteenth
and a spherical-shaped creature unknown to Murray, two or three inches
in diameter. Murray had a laboratory which we built on deck for his
specimens, and it became a good deal of a museum before it finally went
down with the ship.

We got fur clothing enough made by the middle of the month for each man
to have an outfit and I had all the skins we had left collected and put
in canvas bags. The sailors were busy putting our pemmican in 48-pound
packages, sewed up in canvas which later we used for dog harness;
canvas is one thing the dogs will not ordinarily chew.

On the twentieth we saw bear tracks near the ship. There had been
cracks in the ice and ribbons of open water at some distance from the
ship and the Eskimo had continued their seal hunting with considerable
success. The dogs, curiously enough, though tethered at various points
around on the ice, were not aware of the bear’s presence.

Wherever there are seal you will find bear because the bear hunt the
seal and live on them. When I was hunting with Paul Rainey and Harry
Whitney in 1910 in Lancaster Sound, that historic entrance to the
islands and waters west of Baffin Land, I saw a bear creeping along the
ice very stealthily. So intent was he that he did not know I was there
and I watched him steal up on a seal asleep on the ice. He got nearer
and nearer and finally made a spring and landed on his prey. The seal
never woke up.

Sometimes the ice would be closed up and our Eskimo would get no seal,
or the weather would be bad and the sky overcast, but when the ice
parted and the water-lanes opened, if the air was fine, the seal would
sometimes swim over to the edge of the floe, put their flippers up and
crawl out of the water. Then they would lie out on the ice and sun
themselves. After a time, as the sun disappeared and the raw wind came
up, they would become cold from staying on the ice and then they would
slide back into the water. I have seen seal off the Newfoundland coast
that were so sunburned after lying for many days on the ice, blockaded
in the bays by the on-shore winds, that they actually cried out with
pain when they finally went into the water, and came back on to the ice
again at once.




CHAPTER IX

IN WINTER QUARTERS


We made another change in our routine October 28, going on to a
schedule of two meals a day, breakfast at nine o’clock and dinner at
half-past four. Tea could be obtained at one o’clock and at night,
before going to bed, any one could have tea or coffee or chocolate.
From six o’clock at night to six the next morning whoever was assigned
for that night to be watchman was on his rounds, looking after the
fires and lights and keeping the water from freezing in the water-tank.
All lights except the watchman’s lantern were out at mid-night. At six
o’clock he would wake the cook, who slept in a room off the galley,
and after waiting to have his breakfast would turn in, a day watchman
taking his place from 6 A. M. to 6 P. M.

For breakfast we always had oatmeal porridge, with condensed milk.
This was followed by various things, for we tried to make the menu
interesting. We would have eggs, ham, bacon, codfish, sausages, and
of course coffee. For dinner we would have canned oysters or clams,
shredded codfish from Newfoundland, potatoes (desiccated and frozen,
to be thawed out as we wanted to use them), carrots, parsnips, spinach,
pickles, asparagus, beans, corn, tomatoes. We always had fresh meat
at least once a day, seal meat or, when we got any, later on, bear
meat. For dessert we had ice-cream, in all flavors, or sherbet, pies,
puddings, fancy cakes, and earlier had had watermelon and cantaloupe.
At all times we had a great variety of canned fruits. In fact we were
well supplied with about everything obtainable.

About this time we began putting the clock back to get the benefit of
all the daylight. The men did not have to get up until breakfast-time
but at ten o’clock they had to be ready for the day’s work. This
consisted of sewing canvas, making clothing, sewing pemmican up in
canvas, shifting boxes and putting things over on the big floe,
shovelling snow, filling up the locker with coal, bringing in
fresh-water ice for melting in the tank, doing various odd jobs around
the ship and fixing up the dredge-hole.

We had plenty of soap and razors and plenty of underclothing, so we
kept clean. We made it a rule to shave at least three times a week
and to bathe at least once. Even the Eskimo bathed like the rest of
us. When Kataktovick joined us he said, “I like my bath.” In Nome and
St. Michael’s the Eskimo have a bath-house where they can bathe by
paying twenty-five cents and they patronize it freely. We had several
bath-tubs on the _Karluk_.

On the twenty-seventh, too, we blew down the boiler, drew the water
off, disconnected the engines and blew all the water out of the pipes.

At eight o’clock on the evening of the twenty-eighth we were gathered
in the saloon, some of us reading, some playing chess, others playing
cards, when we were alarmed by a loud report coming from the direction
of the bow. In an instant, with practically no interval, we heard
another report, from the port quarter. The watchman came in and said
there was a crack in the ice at the stem of the ship. I went out and
with our lantern we could see what had happened. The ice had cracked at
the bow and again about fifty yards away on the port quarter and the
ice had opened up for about two feet running in a westerly direction
on the port bow. The dogs were separated from the ship by the crack.
We made haste to get them on board, together with skin-boats, sledges
and sounding-machines, for we were afraid the ice might break up all
around the ship. I stayed up all night and had every one standing
by for trouble, but again nothing happened, and next morning with a
high wind blowing the drifting snow along the surface of the ice and
a temperature of twenty-four degrees below zero, we found that the
cracks had closed up again. Twice during the day the ice opened again
but closed up at once. These cracks were only an inch or two in width.

November began with a renewed violence of the gale and we drifted
to the northwest. For the first time we pumped out the hold with a
hand-pump in the engine-room. As long as we had steam up we did the
pumping with steam from the boiler but now that the boiler was blown
down we pumped by hand on deck, but that was a difficult job on account
of the cold, so by having a stove in the engine-room which kept the
temperature above freezing we found that we could handle the pump to
better advantage there.

We built an observatory for Malloch by covering in the bridge with
boards and sails with an opening at the top. Malloch had his transit
here and was untiring in his efforts to get our position. He relieved
me of much of the labor of taking the observations and was a great help
throughout. In the afternoon of this first of November we had clear
weather for a short time and were treated to a remarkable display of
the aurora, one of the few that we had in all our months of drifting
and ice travel. During the gale that kept up all day we dragged our
dredge and parted the line, so that we had to put on a new dredge. The
next day we got specimens of several species, including a number of
different kinds of starfish. Our soundings showed that we were drifting
in comparatively shallow waters shoaling to 105 fathoms on the first
and to 36 on the second. Mr. Hadley and I busied ourselves scraping
deerskins, a necessary preliminary to their use in making clothing; the
scraping is done to break the vellum, to loosen them up, for when they
are hard they do not keep you so warm.

November 4 we found another new animal in the dredge. The soundings now
gave us only 28 fathoms. The wind fluctuated in violence all day long,
finally settling down to a good-sized gale, with drifting snow. On the
seventh open water appeared about two miles from the ship. The Eskimo
went out and shot ten seal. I was with them and we saw many more seal
out in the water but they were too far away for us.

November 10 was an unusually beautiful day. There was a fresh south
wind and the temperature went up to twenty-three degrees above zero;
it was almost like a spring day. About three miles from the ship the
Eskimo shot six seal. They also got the first bear of our drift, a
young one three or four years old, about six feet long, with a good
coat. They had been on the lookout for bear, on account of the amount
of seal meat they had left on the ice. I intended to give the skin of
this bear to the Boston City Club for its new club-house but we needed
it and had to use it for trousers and mittens. Everybody was still
wearing American clothes at this time, with deerskin boots.

We had the deck covered with snow about two feet deep to make the ship
warm; when the top of the snow became dirty we took off a few inches
and replaced it with clean snow. The outside of the ship was banked up
and we built a kind of runway from the deck to the ice with walls made
of blocks of snow. This made our passage between the ship and the ice
easy.

November 11 the sun left us for good; we were now to be without it
throughout the twenty-four hours for seventy-one days.

The young Eskimo widower, Kataktovick, came to me the next day and
asked me for a fountain pen, to write letters to his Eskimo friends, I
presume. Some weeks before he had asked me for a book to read; after a
fortnight he brought it back, said that he had read it and asked for
some magazines. We had a good many and the pictures were interesting
so I let him have them gladly. On this particular day he came into
my cabin and saw me writing with a fountain pen. Kataktovick did not
ask outright for the pen but simply said that he wanted something to
write with. I offered him a pencil but he shook his head and said
that was not what he wanted. Then I asked him if the pen was what he
wanted. He said it was. I gave him one, as we had a large quantity of
fountain pens, and as I gave it to him I thought to myself: “What would
Peary say?” To live in the open as they have been accustomed to live
is in his judgment the Eskimo’s normal existence and not to become
dependent on the white man’s methods of life. We had a large supply of
blank-books on board, in which our scientists jotted down notes and
calculations to be afterwards transcribed on the typewriter, and I gave
Kataktovick some of these blank-books from time to time.

The next day we had another wonderful display of the aurora, with
brilliant moonlight, which had been lighting up the scene for several
days. For a while in the afternoon, as we drifted steadily along, we
saw a little of the sun’s upper limb. Our latitude was too far north
for us to see the real sun at this time of year; it was the distorted
sun that we saw, like the mirage which one sees in a desert.

I remember that when I was a boy in the Methodist Academy in Brigus,
the town where I was born in Newfoundland, the Anglo-American Telegraph
superintendent at St. John’s once told us that when he was a young
man at Cape Race a certain ship from Europe was expected at a given
time but failed to appear. Finally they apparently saw her heading in
towards shore, and they launched a boat and went out to meet her. When
they reached the spot where she was supposed to be she was not there
and did not turn up until some ten hours later. Her apparent presence
was simply a peculiarity of the sea-horizon, a refraction or distortion.

The Eskimo reported fox tracks a few miles from the ship and I gave
them a dozen fox traps. The Arctic fox is of a clear white color, his
pelt often whiter than that of the polar bear, which sometimes verges
on the yellow. The Eskimo set the traps at various points on the ice,
fastened securely so that the foxes would not carry them away, and on
the seventeenth they caught one very small fox. Mr. Hadley finished
the second Peary sledge. We lost the dredge again on the seventeenth
and had to replace it with another one, which brought up some more
specimens new to Murray. The temperature was only nine below zero but
it was as cold as it is along the Atlantic seaboard in winter because
just now there was much open water about us, though it was a good many
miles away. On our North Pole trips we had much lower temperatures than
we were now having but felt the cold less because it remained at the
same level for weeks and was free from dampness because there were not
so many open leads.

On the nineteenth we lost the lead and tube of the Kelvin
sounding-machine; the wire kinked and broke, so we had to attach
another lead and brass tube. It was a typical Cape Sheridan day, a
magnificent morning with hardly any wind and a temperature of nineteen
below zero.

Soot had accumulated in the funnel of my cabin stove, so that the fire
would not burn, and I determined on the twentieth to adopt heroic
measures to get the soot out. The method which I finally hit upon was
effective but disturbing. I decided to pour a lot of flashlight powder
in the stove, as this would give a quick puff and blow out the soot.
I was pouring the powder in, when I inadvertently poured too fast and
got too much in. Flash! The door of the stove came off and sailed past
my head; if it had hit me it would have killed me. As it was the stove
lost its bearings and landed with a tremendous crash against the side
of the room, but no particular damage was done—except to the soot.

Murray got a little octopus in the dredge. He had been getting stones,
small pebbles at first and then larger ones, almost perfectly round
and very smooth. Now, however, he began to get specimens of previously
unknown animal life again—eleven different kinds in one day. He was
faithful and untiring in his dredging and his work, at which we all
helped, was not the kind that had the apparent zest of hunting or
exploration in it, but called for patient investigation and, always,
hard labor. It was a great pity that we were unable to save the things
his dredging brought up.

On the twenty-second my thoughts turned towards Boston and Cambridge,
for I knew that this was the day of the Harvard-Yale football game,
which I had attended so many times. I wondered who would win and as the
afternoon wore on I thought of what must be taking place on Soldiers’
Field and of the life and activity in the hotels of Boston the night
after the game.

I looked back and remembered some of the things that had happened when
I had seen games in the past and wondered when I should see another. I
recalled how I went down to New Haven the day before the game in 1910
and went into the country to the Yale headquarters and talked to the
team on our North Pole trip of the previous year to take their minds
off their troubles. And I remembered, too, how George Borup took the
news of the 1908 game when we got our mail for the first time in over
a year on our way home in the _Roosevelt_ from the North Pole trip
in the late summer of 1909. He and MacMillan occupied the same cabin
and were eagerly looking over their letters when suddenly Borup began
to cry out in tones of anguish, “Oh, dear! Oh, isn’t that terrible!
Oh, I can’t believe it’s true!” until MacMillan was sure that he had
learned of the death of some near relative. Finally when he felt that
he must ask he ventured to inquire the cause of Borup’s mourning and to
hope that he had not heard bad news. “Why, just think!” replied Borup.
“Harvard beat Yale last fall, 4 to 0!” Now, on November 22, 1913, when
the sky cleared to the south and we were treated to a red glow in that
direction to light up the darkness I wondered if anything happening in
the vicinity of Cambridge was having its effect on the meteorological
conditions.

We had reached nearly to Lat. 73 N. on November 15. This proved to be
our farthest north. After that for a month the winds drove us south
and southwest and then for the rest of our drift more nearly due west
again. We now had a little relief from the incessant sixty-mile gale
which had been making it intensely cold for a number of days and on the
twenty-fourth the red glow continuing gave us the effect of a little
twilight which enabled Malloch to read the transit in his observatory
without the aid of a lantern. The temperature was twenty below zero,
but the air was so clear and clean that one could go about out of doors
with American clothes on without discomfort. Just before midnight,
however, the thermometer began to climb and the barometer to drop,
denoting the approach of a storm, and all day long on the twenty-fifth
it was a miserable time to be out. We had our work to do, however, and
the Eskimo finished banking up the starboard side of the ship with snow
to make things as warm and comfortable as possible.

November 27 was Thanksgiving Day in the States but as we were a
Canadian expedition we made no observance of the day. My thoughts took
another backward glance to the Thanksgiving Days I had spent in Belmont
and Winchester and elsewhere, with my good friends of Boston.

The day began early with me because I was awakened from a sound sleep,
almost choking to death from the sulphurous fumes of the mess-room
stove which I found on getting out of my cabin was smoking badly.
Chafe, the mess-room steward, was making heroic efforts to get the fire
going to take the fumes off. I told him to take hold of the stove with
me and carry it out on deck, which we managed to do.




CHAPTER X

THE ARCTIC NIGHT


The first few days of December were cold and stormy, with very high
winds. I made up my mind that we were in the place where all the bad
weather was manufactured, to be passed along to Medicine Hat and thence
distributed to Chicago and Boston and points south. We got a little
twilight from ten to two on pleasant days, so that the men could see
to work out of doors. The health of the party throughout our drift
was excellent. Every one had plenty of vigorous, outdoor exercise and
slept soundly, though the incessant howling of the wind was not always
conducive to a feeling of carefree contentment.

There was considerable pressure early in the month at a point about
a mile from the ship, which tossed the ice into rafters, but we did
not feel it on board. On the tenth a ribbon of water about a foot
wide showed in the ice about two hundred yards from the ship, opening
and closing off and on for several days. The temperature was getting
pretty cold now, down in the minus thirties, yet the air was clear
much of the time and we were not uncomfortable out of doors, even in
American clothes. Mr. Hadley finished the third Peary sledge on the
eleventh. On the same day I had the Eskimo build a large snow igloo on
the floe where we had our box-house of supplies, to furnish additional
shelter for ourselves and the dogs. We began making wooden boxes for
the protection of our Primus stoves in case we had to take to the ice.
The Primus stove is an ingenious device for heating tea or whatever
else you have that needs heating; it uses kerosene oil, ignited by
means of alcohol, works somewhat like a plumber’s torch and has long
been used by men engaged in Arctic work. It is not so efficient as the
special alcohol stove invented by Peary for his expeditions but as a
general rule it does good work. On our trip to Wrangell Island, we used
gasoline in these stoves, although warned by the directions in big red
letters not to do so. In spite of the directions the gasoline worked
well and did not need to be ignited by alcohol.

On the sixteenth I had the Eskimo dig out the seal meat which we had
kept in the “ice-houses” near the ship and put it on deck, so that
we could have it handy in case the ice broke up around the ship.
Furthermore, I wanted to see how much we had accumulated. I found that
we had forty-one seal, about 1600 pounds, enough to last twenty-five
people sixty-seven days. Not every one on board liked seal meat but all
could eat it. I had Mamen at work these days making up a list of things
required in case I went on another Arctic drift some time. Murray lost
his dredge again on the eighteenth when it caught on the ice and parted
the line; the chief engineer started work at once on another.

December 21 was the Arctic midnight, the day of days in the Arctic, the
day that we all looked forward to, for now the sun was coming towards
us every day, and every day the daylight would lengthen. We were
not, of course, getting real daylight but at midday we got a kind of
twilight that was good enough to get about by, out of doors. Mr. Hadley
and I experimented with the acetylene lights but found that outside of
the ship they would not work because the water froze.

On the twenty-second much of the twilight time was used in clearing
away the huge banks of snow that had drifted about the ship. The chess
tournament was decided on that day. The men had been playing it for
a good while and now the winner of the most games received the first
prize, a box of fifty cigars, and the next man the second prize, a box
of twenty-five cigars. Mamen took the first prize and the mate, Mr.
Anderson, the second.

The dogs, which we had been keeping all together in the box-house,
broke their chains on the twenty-third, and some of them got into a
fight; our best dog, Jack, was so badly bitten that he could not walk.
I took him on board and down into the carpenter’s shop where Mr. Hadley
sewed up his wounds with surgical needle and silk cord. Poor Jack
was in bad shape and at first refused all food. He received constant
attention from Mr. Hadley but could not bear a harness until the latter
part of February. The fight in which he was hurt warned us that we must
not keep too many dogs together, so I had the Eskimo build several snow
kennels in a large snow-bank near the ship. They sprinkled ashes on the
floor of the kennels and chained up the nine most quarrelsome dogs,
each in his separate kennel.

With the approach of Christmas all hands began to make plans for the
proper celebration of that good old holiday. The spirits of the whole
party were excellent; now that they were in the neighborhood of the
place where Santa Claus came from they seemed determined to observe the
day in a manner worthy of the jolly old saint.

At six o’clock on Christmas morning the second engineer and McKinlay
started in decorating the cabin with the flags of the International
Code and a fine lot of colored ribbon which Mr. Hadley had brought with
him from Point Barrow for the trading he had hoped to do in Banks
Land. Later in the morning I went around and distributed presents to
the Eskimo. I gave each of the Eskimo men a hunting-knife and a watch
and the Eskimo woman a cotton dress, stockings and underwear, talcum
powder, soap, a looking-glass, a comb and brush and some ribbon, with a
cotton dress for each of the little girls.

At eleven o’clock the first event on our typewritten programme
began—the sports. This was the list:


 D. G. S. _Karluk_. XMAS DAY, 1913

 The events of the sports programme arranged for the day will take
 place in the following order:

  1. 100 yards sprint
  2. Long jump (standing)
  3. Long jump (running)
  4. Sack race
  5. High jump

 Interval for refreshments

  6. Three-legged race
  7. Putting the weight
  8. 50-yard burst
  9. Hop, step and leap
  10. Tug of war
  11. Obstacle race
  12. Wrestling

 Proceedings will commence at 11 A. M. (_Karluk_ time); dogs and
 bookmakers not allowed on the field.

The doctor was umpire and wore a paper rosette. I was the official
starter and fired a pistol in the regulation manner.

Mamen won the running long jump and would have won all the other
jumps and races if he had entered them. The obstacle race was funny
to watch and greatly enjoyed. The contestants started on the ice on
the starboard side about amidships. From here they had to go to, and
under, the jib-boom from which hung loops of rope; they had to pass
through these loops and then under some sledges turned bottom up. Then
they had to keep on around the ship to a kind of track which we had
dug in a snow-bank running at right angles to the ship; the track was
just wide enough for a man to put both feet in and they had to go up
the track and down again. This was no easy task and it was a cause for
hilarious mirth to watch them trying to pass each other in the narrow
path. Then they had to go to the dredge igloo where life-belts had been
placed, each marked with its owner’s name. Each man had to find his own
life-belt and put it on just as he would wear it if he were called upon
to use it. It was pitch dark in the igloo; a man would rush in, pick up
a life-belt and rush out again on to the ice to look at the belt in the
twilight and see if it were his. It often took a man several trips to
find his own. Then they made the final dash to the starting-point and
the first man home with his life-belt on, as if for regular use, won
the race. Williamson, the second engineer, was the winner.

The Eskimo entered all the sports and even Keruk took part in most of
them. I pulled in the tug of war, to make both sides even, and I am
proud to say that my side won. We did not have the wrestling-match
because it got too dark to see.

It was a fine day and the men wore American clothes and sweaters. For
several days before Christmas we had had a severe storm with a high
wind which blew the tops of the ice ridges bare of snow and gave the
scene the appearance of a ploughed field. On Christmas Eve, however,
the wind subsided so that all day long on Christmas Day we had good
weather, clear, crisp air, with a temperature of twenty below zero.

Dinner as usual was at half past four. I confess that I felt homesick
and thought of other Christmas dinners. It was my fourth Christmas in
the Arctic; in 1898 I had been with Peary at Cape D’Urville on the
_Windward_ and in 1905 and 1908 at Cape Sheridan with the _Roosevelt_,
but our situation now had far more elements of uncertainty in it than
we had felt on those occasions and in addition this time it was I who
had the responsibility for the lives and fortunes of every man, woman
and child in the party.

We sat down at 4:30 P. M. to a menu laid out and typewritten by
McKinlay:

  “Such a bustle ensued”

  Mixed Pickles      Sweet Pickles
            Oyster Soup
            Lobster
            Bear Steak
            Ox Tongue
  Potatoes           Green Peas
      Asparagus and Cream Sauce
  Mince Pie          Plum Pudding
            Mixed Nuts
       Tea             Cake
           Strawberries

  “God Bless You, Merry Gentlemen;
    May Nothing You Dismay!”

Murray produced a cake which had been given in Victoria to cut for this
particular occasion and which he had kept carefully secreted. Dinner,
which was a great credit to Bob, the cook, was followed by cigars and
cigarettes and a concert on the Victrola which had been presented
to the ship by Sir Richard McBride. We had records that played both
classical and popular music, vocal and instrumental, and we kept this
up with singing, to a late hour. Malloch wrote a Christmas letter of
many pages to his father, a letter which, alas, was destined never to
be delivered.

On Friday the twenty-sixth a crack in the ice made from the waist of
the ship towards the stern, running for about a hundred yards off the
starboard bow. The crack did not open, but for the first time in our
drift we felt a slight tremor on the ship. In about an hour we felt
another slight tremor. I followed the crack for a hundred yards and
then lost it. There was a fresh north-northeast wind which moderated
as the day wore on but it looked as if we were in for some more bad
weather, though the barometer was steady, and next day we began to get
things ready to leave the ship at once, in case we should have to get
out in a hurry. Everything was where we could lay our hands on it at
once.

Our soundings had been giving us depths of about twenty-five fathoms,
which did not tally with our charts. It seemed likely that our
chronometer was a trifle slow and that we were somewhat to the westward
of our apparent position. We had a clear view of the sky with a very
pronounced twilight glow to the south.

On the twenty-eighth we altered the ship’s time again to get the
benefit of the increasing twilight. Molly gave birth to a litter of
nine pups, which, if she had not eaten most of them, would have been
useful members of the party, had our drift continued for another year
so that they could have grown large enough to use. The prizes won on
Christmas Day were now distributed: safety razors and extra blades,
shaving-soap, hair-clippers, goggles, pipes, sweaters, shirts, and
various other things.

As soon as it was light on the twenty-ninth I kept a sharp eye out for
land; south by west, by the compass, I could see a blue cloud raised
up on the horizon. According to the soundings we should have been
nearer Wrangell Island than Herald Island; I was inclined to think
that it was Herald Island, although working out our position with our
chronometer readings gave us Herald Island sixty miles to the south.
Afterwards I found out that our observations at this time were correct
but that the soundings were not right on the chart. What deceived us
more than anything else was the big mirage; Herald Island looked large
and distorted for many days. Later in the day I went aloft to see if
I could make out which island it really was but on account of the
imperfect light I found it impossible to tell.

Some time during the night the ice cracked about a hundred yards from
the ship and made an open ribbon of water ten inches wide; during the
next day the young ice was cracking a good deal all around us. There
was no lateral movement of the ice.

The next day was the last day of 1913. Our time was six hours and
thirty-six minutes later than Boston and New York time and as the day
wore on and it got to be 5:24 P. M. I realized that it was midnight on
Tremont Street and Broadway and I thought of the friends who would now
be seeing the old year out and the new year in. I wondered what they
thought had become of us on the _Karluk_, and whether the news of our
unforeseen drift had yet reached them from Stefansson. I could picture
the carefree throngs in the hotels waiting for the lights to go out for
the moment of midnight and greeting 1914 with a cheer and a song.

We had our own New Year’s celebration, though it was only a coincidence
that it came on this particular day, for we had planned a football game
on the ice when the weather should be good and the wind fairly light;
New Year’s Day happened to be the first good day for it.

The ball was made of seal-gut, cut into sections and sewed up, with
surgeon’s plaster over the seams. We blew it up with a pipe stem and
plugged up the hole. To protect the ball we had a sealskin casing made
to fit it; the result was a fairly good ball, constructed on the same
principle as any college football.

It was Scotland vs. All-Nations; the game was association football,
played on a field of regulation size laid out on young ice about a foot
and a half in thickness. At each end of the field were goal posts with
the usual cross-bar.

Fireman Breddy was captain of All-Nations and Mr. Munro of Scotland.
The Eskimo, though not well-versed in the game, played well. Keruk,
clad as usual in dress and bloomers, was goal-tender for All-Nations.
Some of the players wore skin-boots, others ordinary American shoes. I
had forgotten a good deal about the association game but I refreshed
my memory from the encyclopedia in the ship’s library and armed with a
mouth-organ in lieu of a whistle took my place as referee, umpire and
time-keeper. I soon found, however, that the cold would make it too
dangerous for me to use the “whistle,” for it would freeze to my lips
and take the skin off, so I had to give my signals for play by word of
mouth.

The teams lined up at 11:30. Breddy won the toss and took the western
end of the field. All-Nations scored the first goal and the play ranged
furiously up and down the field until the first thirty-minute period
was over. Then at noon we had an intermission and served coffee. At
half-past twelve the teams lined up again, with changed goals. During
the second half Scotland played well but when the game ended the score
stood: All-Nations, 8; Scotland, 3. Another game was planned for the
following Sunday.




CHAPTER XI

THE SINKING OF THE _KARLUK_


During the night of New Year’s Day we could hear, when we were below,
a rumbling noise not unlike that which one often hears singing along
the telegraph wires on a country road. The sound was inaudible from the
deck. It was clear that there was tremendous pressure somewhere, though
there were no visible indications of it in the vicinity of the ship.
We were practically stationary. Apparently the great field of ice in
which we had been zigzagging for so many months had finally brought up
on the shore of Wrangell Island and was comparatively at rest, while
the running ice outside this great field was still in active motion and
tended to force the ice constantly in the direction of the island.

On Saturday, with a fresh north wind, in spite of which ship and ice
still remained stationary, the rumbling noise could again be heard in
the interior of the ship.

On Sunday the fourth there was an increasing easterly wind which sent
us slowly westward. Evidently we could make no movement towards the
south on account of the pressure but when the wind blew us towards the
west and north we could go along without undue danger. The football
game was played as planned on this day until the second engineer
strained a muscle in his leg kicking the ball along the ice, and the
game had to stop.

The easterly gale continued for several days, sometimes with hard
snowstorms, sometimes with clearer skies. The barometer was low; the
temperature rose to sixteen degrees above zero. I had the engineers
at work making tins of one-gallon capacity to hold kerosene for
our sledges if we should have to use them. All of our oil was in
five-gallon tins which were unhandy for sledging use. They also
made tea-boilers out of gasoline tins, to be used with the Primus
stoves; these held about a gallon of tea and were very handy. I had
five with me on my subsequent sledge trip. Besides these jobs the
engineers trimmed down our pickaxes so that they would weigh not over
two-and-a-half or three pounds. They put them in the portable forge in
the engine-room, heated the iron and beat it down, and put on the steel
tips afterwards. These pickaxes were regulation miners’ picks.

On the seventh and eighth the variable weather continued with
occasional twilight of considerable intensity; the low barometer and
high thermometer still prevailed. Our observations on the seventh, the
last we were to take on shipboard, gave us our position as Lat. 72.11
N., Long. 174.36 W. The temperature dropped on the ninth; the sky,
which was clear in the morning, became overcast by afternoon and the
wind shifted from southeast to southwest. We were getting nearer the
land and the ice was raftering in places with the pressure, so that I
felt sure that something was going to happen before long. We continued
our preparations for putting emergency supplies in condition to be
handled quickly, putting tea tablets in tins made by the engineers, and
twenty-two calibre cartridges in similar tins. Mannlicher cartridges we
put up in packages of thin canvas, fifty to a package.

At five o’clock on the morning of the tenth I was awakened by a loud
report like a rifle-shot. Then there came a tremor all through the
ship. I was soon on deck. The watchman, who for that night was Brady,
had already been overboard on the ice and I met him coming up the ice
gangway to tell me what he had found. There was a small crack right at
the stem of the ship, he said. I went there with him at once and found
that the crack ran irregularly but in general northwesterly for about
two hundred yards. At first it was very slight, although it was a clean
and unmistakable break; in the course of half an hour, however, it
grew to a foot in width and as the day wore on widened still more until
it was two feet wide on an average.

By 10 A. M. there was a narrow lane of water off both bow and stern.
The ship was now entirely free on the starboard side but still
frozen fast in her ice-cradle on the port side; her head was pointed
southwest. On account of the way in which the ice had split the ship
was held in a kind of pocket; the wind, which was light and from the
north in the earlier part of the day, hauled to the northwest towards
afternoon and increased to a gale, with blinding snowdrift, and the
sheet of ice on the starboard side began to move astern, only a little
at a time. The ship felt no pressure, only slight shocks, and her
hull was still untouched, for the open ends of the pocket fended off
the moving ice, especially at the stern. It was clear to me, however,
that as soon as the moving ice should grind or break off the points of
these natural fenders there was a strong probability that the moving
ice-sheet would draw nearer to the starboard side of the ship and, not
unlike the jaws of a nut-cracker, squeeze her against the sheet in
which she was frozen on the port side, particularly as the wind was
attaining a velocity of forty-five miles an hour.

Everything indicated, therefore, that the time was near at hand when
we should have to leave the ship. We must have things ready. I gave
orders to get the snow off the deck and the skylights and the outer
walls of the cabin, to lighten her. Some of the men were sent over to
the box-house to remove the few dogs that were still tethered there and
set them free on the ice, and to get the house ready in case we had to
move in to it. They cleaned it up, put fresh boards on the floor and
laid a fire in the stove, ready for lighting.

The men worked with good spirit and seemed unperturbed. I sent them
about their daily tasks, as usual, so far as possible, and the
preparation of the box-house was in the nature of an emergency drill.
For if the points of the ice should continue unbroken the ship would
still be saved; we had seen plenty of cracks before in our drift that
had remained open some time and then closed up again, though of course
no previous break had come so near the ship. It was hard to see what
was going on around us for the sky was overcast and the darkness was
the kind which, as the time-honored phrase goes, you could cut with a
knife, while the stinging snowdrift, whirling and eddying through the
air, under the impetus of the screaming gale, added to the uncertainty
as to what was about to happen from moment to moment.

At about half past seven in the evening I chanced to be standing near
the engine-room door. The lamps were lighted. The labors of the day
were over and now, after dinner, the men were playing cards or reading
or sewing, as usual. All at once I heard a splitting, crashing sound
below. I went down into the engine-room and found the chief engineer
there. We could hear water rushing into the hold and by lantern-light
could see it pouring in at different places for a distance of ten feet
along the port side. As I had feared, the ice astern had broken or
worn off and the sheet moving along the starboard side had swung in
against the ship, heeling her over three or four feet to port; a point
of ice on the port side had pierced the planking and timbers of the
engine-room for ten feet or more, ripping off all the pump fixtures and
putting the pump out of commission. It was obvious that it would be
useless to attempt to rig a temporary pump; the break was beyond repair.

I went on deck again and gave the order, “All hands abandon ship.” We
had all the fires except that in the galley extinguished at once and
all the lamps, using hurricane lanterns to see our way around. There
was no confusion. The men worked with a will, putting the emergency
supplies overboard on the ice, some ten thousand pounds of pemmican,
furs, clothing, rifles and cartridges. The Eskimo woman, with her
children, I sent to the box-house to start the fire in the stove and
keep the place warm. The steward was kept in the galley so that the men
could have coffee and hot food.

By 10.45 P. M. there was eleven feet of water in the engine-room. At
this stage the pressure of the ice on both sides kept the ship from
going down. We were less than an hour getting the supplies off the ship
on to the ice; we could have saved everything on board but no attempt
was made to save luxuries or souvenirs or personal belongings above the
essentials, for it did not seem advisable to burden the sledges on our
prospective journey over the ice with loads of material that would have
to occupy space needed for indispensables.

When I was satisfied with the amount of supplies on the ice I started
the men sledging the stuff over to the big floe. Here, as I have said,
in addition to the box-house, we had a large snow igloo which had been
completed some time before. It had been smashed in by the wind, but
the men now repaired it and made it ready for occupancy. They did a
good job with their evening’s work and I told them so, and said that
they could turn in at the box-house and igloo and go to sleep whenever
they got their sledging done. At half-past two in the morning they were
ready and turned in; to the box-house were assigned McKinlay, Mamen,
Beuchat, Murray, Dr. Mackay, Williams, King, Chafe, Kataktovick and
Kerdrillo and his family, and to the snow igloo Munro, Williamson,
Breddy, Hadley, Templeman, Maurer, Brady, Anderson, Barker, Malloch and
myself.

After every one else had left the ship I remained on board to await the
end. For a time the chief engineer and Hadley stayed with me. There
was a big fire in the galley and we moved the Victrola in there to
while away the time. After the first sharp crash and the closing in of
the ice the pressure was not heavy and all through the morning of the
eleventh and well into the afternoon, the ship remained in about the
same position as when she was first struck. No more water was coming
in; the ice was holding her up. I would play a few records—we had a
hundred and fifty or so altogether—and then I would go outside and
walk around the deck, watching for any change in the ship’s position.
It cleared off towards noon and there was a little twilight but the
snow was still blowing. As I played the records I threw them into the
stove. At last I found Chopin’s _Funeral March_, played it over and
laid it aside. I ate when I was hungry and had plenty of coffee and
tea. My companions had gone over to the floe and turned in early in the
morning. It was quite comfortable in the galley, for I could keep the
fire going with coal from the galley locker. At times I would take a
look into the engine-room, being careful not to get too far from an
exit; the water was nearly up to the deck.

At 3.15 P. M. the ice opened and the ship began to get lower in the
water. Then the ice closed up again for a while and supported her by
the bowsprit and both quarters. About half past three she began to
settle in earnest and as the minutes went by the decks were nearly
a-wash. Putting Chopin’s _Funeral March_ on the Victrola, I started
the machine and when the water came running along the deck and poured
down the hatches, I stood up on the rail and as she took a header
with the rail level with the ice I stepped off. It was at 4 P. M. on
January 11, 1914, with the blue Canadian Government ensign at her
main-topmast-head, blowing out straight and cutting the water as it
disappeared, and the Victrola in the galley sending out the strains of
Chopin’s _Funeral March_, that the _Karluk_ sank, going down by the
head in thirty-eight fathoms of water. As she took the final plunge, I
bared my head and said, “_Adios, Karluk!_” It was light enough to see
and the rest of the party came out of the camp to watch the end. As she
went down the yards lodged on the ice and broke off; in such a narrow
lane of water did she disappear. It is always a tragic moment when
a ship sinks, the ship that has been your home for months; it is not
unlike losing some good and faithful friend. Twice before I had been
shipwrecked, on both occasions on the southern coast of Newfoundland,
so the sensation was not altogether new to me, but it was none the less
poignant. Yet I could feel no despair in our present situation, for we
had comfortable quarters on a floe which was practically indestructible
and plenty of food and fuel, so that with patience, perseverance,
courage and good fortune we should be able to win our way back to
safety in due time.

[Illustration: PAGES FROM CAPTAIN BARTLETT’S DIARY

“Sunday, Jan’y 11th. 3.15 p. m. ship began to settle till bowsprit and
quarter caught on ice. 4 p. m. ship disappeared sinking in 38 fathoms
water.”]




CHAPTER XII

OUR HOME AT SHIPWRECK CAMP


The point where the _Karluk_ went down was hard by the place where the
_Jeannette_ of the De Long expedition was frozen in the ice and began
her westward drift to a point off Henrietta Island, where she was
crushed, in much the same manner as the _Karluk_, by the opening and
closing of the ice, and sank June 12, 1881.

As I study the map of the polar regions and see how we drifted from
a point near the 145th meridian to a point near the 175th meridian,
west longitude, and how the _Jeannette_ drifted from a point near the
175th meridian, west longitude, to a point near the 155th meridian,
east longitude, and then how the _Fram_ drifted from a point near the
140th meridian, east longitude, to a point near the 10th meridian, east
longitude, and realize that the sum of these three drifts embraces more
than half the distance around the continental periphery, I can not help
coming to the conclusion that the idea of casks and wreckage drifting
across the Pole from the waters of Alaska and Siberia to the Greenland
Sea opposite is a mistaken one. Wreckage from the _Jeannette_ drifted
ashore on the southern coast of Greenland in 1884, and this gave Dr.
Nansen the idea on which he based his expedition in the _Fram_, that a
ship allowed to freeze in the ice north of the New Siberian Islands,
near the point where the _Jeannette_ sank, would be carried by the
currents in a drift across the Pole. Nansen himself left the _Fram_ in
the course of her drift and made a journey over the ice in an attempt
to reach the Pole, getting to 86° 34 N., and after his departure the
_Fram_, in her drift, reached almost as high a latitude as he attained
on foot, without, however, giving evidence of the accuracy of the
theory of a drift across the Pole. I believe, that the drift follows
the general outline of the land, from east to west around the periphery
of the Arctic Ocean, and that a craft, built in general like the
_Roosevelt_ but not so large, with a ship’s company of eight who should
be crew and scientific staff in one, could follow this drift from
beginning to end, and would, in a period of three or four years, cover
the greater part of the circuit of the Arctic Ocean.

Such an expedition would add much to our scientific knowledge of the
Arctic regions, working out the ocean currents, exploring the floor of
the sea, obtaining accurate soundings for plotting positions on the
chart, outlining the continental shelf, gathering information about the
air currents for the use of students of aviation, collecting valuable
meteorological data, continuous for the period of the drift, for the
use of weather bureaus, and perhaps making possible the finding of
new lands in the vast unexplored region north of Siberia. England and
Norway have turned their attention to the Antarctic and it is America’s
place to undertake the task of completing our knowledge of the Arctic,
so far advanced through centuries of Anglo-Saxon endeavor. As Nansen
said, in stating his plans for his expedition in the _Fram_: “People,
perhaps, still exist who believe that it is of no importance to explore
the unknown polar regions. This, of course, shows ignorance. It is
hardly necessary to mention here of what scientific importance it is
that these regions should be thoroughly explored. The history of the
human race is a continual struggle from darkness towards light. It is,
therefore, to no purpose to discuss the use of knowledge; man wants to
know, and when he ceases to do so, he is no longer man.”

       *       *       *       *       *

As soon as the _Karluk_ sank, I turned in at the igloo to have a good
sleep, for I had been awake since five o’clock on the morning of the
tenth, and it was now late in the afternoon of the eleventh.

It was nearly noon of the next day before I awoke. The sky was clear
overhead but the fresh northwest wind kept the snow spinning over the
ice and there was still only a brief twilight in the middle of the day.
As soon as they could see their way around in this half light, I had
all hands at work picking up the odds and ends scattered about on the
ice and had a tent erected to house the supplies sledged from the ship
on the previous night.

In this tent, into which no one was allowed to go but McKinlay, who
acted as a kind of stock-clerk, and myself, were placed the following
supplies which will show how well equipped we were with the essentials
for life in the Arctic:

   70 suits Jaeger underwear
    6 sweaters
    8 dozen wool shirts
  200 pairs stockings
    3 bolts of gaberdine
    6 fleece suits
    4 Burberry hunting suits
    2 large sacks of deer legs
    2 large sacks of waterskin boots (sealskin boots for shedding water)
  100 pairs of mukluks
  100 fawn skins
    1 dozen hair-seal skins
    2 ugsug skins
   20 reindeer skins
    6 large winter reindeer skins
   50 Jaeger blankets
   20 mattresses

On the floe itself and arranged to be easily accessible were:

  4056 pounds of Underwood pemmican
  5222 pounds of Hudson’s Bay pemmican
     3 drums of coal oil
    15 cases of coal oil
     2 boxes of tea
   200 tins of milk
   250 pounds of sugar
     2 boxes of chocolate
     2 boxes of butter
     1 box of cocoa
  Candles and matches

Besides these supplies in the tent and on the floe we had, of course,
the coal, clothing, and equipment which we had been placing on the ice
through the previous months, consisting, besides ammunition, pemmican,
milk, clothing, tea, coffee, sugar, and butter, of these things:

   250 sacks of coal
    33 cases of gasoline
     1 case of codfish
     3 large cases of cod steak
     5 drums of alcohol
     4 cases of desiccated eggs
   114 cases of pilot bread, each case containing 48 pounds in small tins
     5 barrels of beef
     9 sledges, each capable of carrying 600 or 700 pounds
  2000 feet of lumber
     3 coal stoves
     2 wood stoves
    90 feet of stove-pipe
     1 extra suit of sails
     2 Peterborough canoes

The snow igloo was fifteen feet long and twelve feet wide, with rafters
and a canvas roof. The box-house was twenty-five feet long by eighteen
feet wide, well banked up all around with snow. We partitioned off
one end of the box-house to make the galley and put a big stove in it
so that the cook could have a place by himself. We also built another
house for the Eskimo. McKinlay afterwards drew a plan of Shipwreck
Camp, as we called it, which will show how our dwelling-places and
supplies were arranged.

So here we were, like the Swiss Family Robinson, well equipped for
comfortable living, waiting until the return of the sun should give
us daylight enough for ice travel, which was altogether too exacting
and dangerous to attempt in the dark. I did not consider it wise to
use up the energy of men and dogs when they were still unaccustomed to
travelling over the sea-ice and before there was light enough to make
their work effective.

The place where the ship had gone down was frozen over. The ice had
simply opened for a while and then closed up again, and young ice had
formed in the opening.

[Illustration: PLAN OF SHIPWRECK CAMP

10TH JANUARY TO

1914.]

On the thirteenth we began sewing and kept it up day in and day out. We
had done a good deal of sewing on shipboard, but I told the men that
we must have plenty of fur clothing and skin-boots and that we had
better do all the sewing we could. We also made tents and covers of
light canvas for our sledges. We should of course be unable to do any
sewing when we once got under way for the land. We had lanterns and
lamps for light in the various houses.

Fur clothing is so heavy that it has to be sewed by hand but much of
the other work was done on sewing-machines of which we had saved two,
one for the box-house and the other for the snow igloo. Keruk used one
sewing-machine and Mr. Munro the other. He was skilful at this as at a
good many other useful things. He had formerly been a junior officer
on the British warship _Rainbow_, which was afterwards transferred
to the Canadian service; his term of enlistment expired at the time
of the transfer and Captain Hose of the _Rainbow_, commandant of the
Esquimault Navy Yard, recommended him to me for chief engineer of the
_Karluk_.

On the fourteenth it was fine and clear with a temperature of
thirty-eight degrees below zero. The wind was west; our soundings
through a hole cut in the ice gave us thirty-four fathoms. In the
noon twilight we could see land in a southwesterly direction. The men
worked all day long making footbags to use when sleeping; it would
be a great relief to take off the deerskin boots and put on these
footbags, which had fur inside and Burberry cloth outside. I had with
me a coonskin coat which I had bought a few years before in Boston. I
now cut this up and divided it among the men, as far as it would go, to
be made into these footbags. In addition I told each man that he must
have at least four pair of deerskin or sheepskin stockings and three
pair of deerskin boots. We used scissors and knives to cut the skins
into suitable pieces for making boots and clothing. The Eskimos used a
crescent-shaped implement called the _hudlow_, not unlike a mince-meat
chopper; they could use it very deftly and cut out clothing exceedingly
well with it. The skins had to be softened, as I have mentioned before,
by breaking the vellum; this was done by scraping it with a piece of
iron like a chisel. Some Eskimo women soften the vellum by chewing it.

We conducted our lives according to a regular routine similar to that
which we had followed on shipboard during the last few months of our
drift. We kept our records of wind and weather, of soundings and of
temperature, which remained in the minus thirties for a good many days.
We did not bother with latitude as we had the land in view some sixty
to eighty miles away, not distinctly visible but plain enough on a
clear day when the light was fairly good. The light of course came
from the south and the land, being in that direction, was set off by
the twilight glow, and the sun was getting nearer and nearer to the
horizon as the days went by. We saved a chronometer from the ship but
it got somewhat banged about in the transfer from the ship to the camp,
so that we could not depend upon it. I had a watch which I have carried
for a number of years and which I was careful never to allow to run
down.

Each house had a watchman, every man taking his turn. It was his duty
to keep the fires going. At 6 A. M. the watchman would call the cook;
our meal hours were the same as those which we had observed during the
past few months on the ship.

Lights were out at 10 P. M. and all hands turned in. We had a stove
in the centre of the room in each house and around the stove on three
sides, built out from the walls, were the bed-platforms, which came
close to the stove and were on a somewhat higher level. Here we slept
warmly and comfortably on the mattresses we had saved from the ship.

There was plenty to occupy our minds. In addition to our sewing and
other daily tasks, there was time for games of chess and cards and
frequently of an evening we would gather around the fire and have a
“sing.” Sometimes, too, we would dance; I remember one night catching
hold of some one and taking a turn or two on the floor when we tipped
over the stove. It took some lively work to get it set up again.

[Illustration: CAPTAIN BARTLETT’S COPY OF THE RUBÁIYÁT OF OMAR KHAYYAM

“My own constant companion, which I have never tired of reading, was
the ‘Rubáiyát’ of Omar Khayyam. This book I have carried with me
everywhere.”]

The _Karluk_ had a good library and we saved a number of books which
enabled some of us to catch up a little on our reading. We read such
books as “Wuthering Heights,” “Villette,” and “Jane Eyre,” besides more
recent novels. My own constant companion, which I have never tired of
reading, was the “Rubáiyát” of Omar Khayyam. I have a leather-bound
copy of this which was given me by Charles Arthur Moore, Jr., who, with
Harry Whitney and a number of other Yale friends of his, was with me on
a hunting trip in Hudson’s Bay on the sealer _Algerine_ in 1901. This
book I have carried with me everywhere since then, until now, if it had
not been repaired in various places by surgeon’s plaster, I believe
it would fall to pieces. I have had it with me on voyages to South
America and other foreign parts on sailing vessels when I was serving
my years of apprenticeship to get my British master’s certificate in
1905; on both of my trips with Peary as captain of the _Roosevelt_; on
my trip to Europe with Peary after the attainment of the North Pole; on
a hunting trip in the Arctic on the _Boeothic_ in the summer of 1910,
when we brought home the musk-oxen and the polar bear, Silver King, to
the Bronx Park Zoo in New York; on various sealing trips; and now
the self-same copy was with me on the _Karluk_ and afterwards on my
journey to bring about the rescue of our ship’s company. I have read it
over and over again and never seem to tire of it. Perhaps it is because
there is something in its philosophy which appeals to my own feeling
about life and death. For all my experience and observation leads me to
the conclusion that we are to die at the time appointed and not before;
this is, I suppose, what is known as fatalism.

On the night of the fourteenth the dogs had a fight and one of them was
killed. We could ill afford to lose him, for dogs were at a premium
with us, now.

On the fifteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth the weather was
threatening; the sky was overcast and the wind from the north and
northeast, with temperatures not far from forty below zero. The sewing
continued busily. On the sixteenth we overhauled our Primus stoves,
of which we had two of the Swedish and eight of the Lovett pattern.
We also reckoned the amount of oil necessary for them and found that
an imperial gallon, which would fill a stove three and a half times,
would make tea twice a day for fourteen days. The imperial or English
gallon is larger than the American gallon; ten gallons English would
mean a little more than twelve gallons American, according to our
measurements, for we had bought the oil in Nome according to the
American measure and now in transferring it to our handy containers we
used the English measure. I have known this difference between English
and American gallons to make a good deal of trouble for skippers buying
supplies in foreign ports.




CHAPTER XIII

WE BEGIN OUR SLEDGING


On January seventeenth I decided that before long I would send a party
of four men to the land to look out for game, see whether any driftwood
was to be found on Wrangell Island, report on ice conditions and blaze
a trail over the ice. This expedition would make an end to the men’s
enforced inactivity and the natural uneasiness of some of them, which I
was unwilling to prolong if I could avoid doing so, and would, besides,
be valuable in determining our subsequent movements. I did not like
to take the whole party to the island without previously transporting
supplies that would be sure to last them for at least four months.
Furthermore, the men had been living for a long time on shipboard
and were not inured to the cold or yet in condition to withstand
the privations they would have to undergo. None of them had had any
experience in travelling over the Arctic ice during the brief and
meagre light and in the low temperatures which would be our portion for
another month, and the sledging of supplies towards the island would
afford them the necessary practice. Travelling over the sea-ice at any
time is altogether different from land travelling. On the sea-ice you
have to spend a great deal of time looking about for good places to
make the road for the sledging of supplies, for the ice is continually
cracking and shifting and piling up in fantastic ridges from the
pressure when the fissures close up, especially as near the land as we
were, and its surface is so much rougher than the crystal levels of
the lakes and ponds on which the landsman goes skating that there can
hardly be said to be any comparison.

[Illustration: THE ICE-PACK

“On the sea-ice you have to spend a great deal of time looking about
for good places to make the road for the sledging of supplies, for the
ice is continually cracking and shifting and piling up.”]

For the past week or so, I had noticed that our drift was slow, and I
felt that as the daylight lengthened we should have ample time, long
before we could drift away from the land, to sledge enough supplies
ashore to last the party until the birds returned and the ice broke
up. If we could start the men in small parties to relay supplies
to the island we could get a shore camp established where the men
could dry out their foot-gear for their journey back over the ice to
Shipwreck Camp for more supplies, especially if we should find plenty
of driftwood on Wrangell Island, as I hoped and expected; we had fuel
enough at the camp to last a year. The men could erect permanent snow
igloos along the way, for relay stations, and once the road to the
island was made, there would be little difficulty in keeping it open
and by continuing the relays any faults that might come in the
trail could be easily repaired. In these preliminary journeys, as I
have said, the men would get accustomed to ice travel and finally the
whole party, with its supplies, would be safe ashore. We were of course
handicapped by lack of sufficient dogs, and in ice travel and in fact
in any polar work, dogs are the prime requisites for success; man-power
for hauling the sledge-loads of supplies puts a double burden on the
men.

Those assigned for the first shoregoing party were First Mate Anderson,
Second Mate Barker and Sailors King and Brady. They were to go to the
island with three sledges and eighteen dogs, with Mamen and the two
Eskimo men, as a supporting party, to come back with the dogs and two
of the sledges after they had landed the mate’s party on the island.

The eighteenth was another bad day, with a strong northeast gale and
blinding snowdrift. Some of the men were at work loading the three
sledges for the mate’s party. Of the others, those that could be spared
I sent out with pickaxes to make a trail towards the land, so that the
shoregoing party might have a good start, but the weather was so bad
that they had to return to camp after they had gone two or three miles.
They reported seeing bear tracks on the ice and seal in open leads
which they came to. We had plenty of seal meat so no attempt was made
to do any shooting at this time.

Mr. Anderson, McKinlay and myself checked over the three sledge-loads
on the nineteenth and found everything in readiness for the journey
which was to begin the next morning. The next day, however, the bad
weather continued. The watchman called me at 4 A. M. and I found a
southwest gale blowing, with a thick snowstorm, so, as there was no
change in the weather, the mate’s party did not leave. In the afternoon
the storm subsided and by midnight the sky was clear and the air calm
and cold.

The next day, Wednesday the twenty-first, conditions were more
favorable and the party started. In addition to oral instructions about
ice conditions and about returning to camp in case he met with open
water, I gave the mate the following written orders:

  SHIPWRECK CAMP, ARCTIC OCEAN,
  January 20, 1914.

  _My dear Mr. Anderson_:

 You will leave to-morrow morning with Mamen, three sledges, 18 dogs,
 Mr. Barker, Sailors King and Brady and the two Eskimo. The sledges are
 loaded with pemmican, biscuit and oil. You will find list of articles
 attached to this. When you reach Berry Point, Wrangell Island, you
 will be in charge of supplies. Kindly pay special attention to the
 uses of them. The rations are: 1 lb. pemmican, 1 lb. biscuits, with
 tea, per day. One gallon of oil will last you ten days. Mamen will
 leave one sledge and the tent, taking back with him enough supplies
 to carry him to Shipwreck. Whilst on the island you will endeavor to
 find game. Be sure and bring it to your camp. Also collect all the
 driftwood you can find.

  Very sincerely,
  R. A. BARTLETT.

The list of things carried on the sledge may serve to show what the
Arctic traveller needs. Shelter, fuel and food, these are the three
essentials for ice travel as they are for the journey of life itself.
This is the way the mate’s party was equipped when it set out from
Shipwreck Camp on January 21, 1914; there were enough supplies to last
them for three months:


FIRST SLEDGE:

     4 cases of man pemmican
     1 tin of Hudson’s Bay pemmican
    10 gallons of coal oil
  2400 tea tablets
     1 tent and fly
     1 Primus stove
    46 lbs. of biscuits
   500 22-cartridges
     1 22-rifle
  Candles, matches, pickaxes
     1 sledge cover

SECOND SLEDGE:

   25 lbs. of sugar
    4 cases of dog pemmican
    7 tins of Hudson’s Bay pemmican
    2 cases of biscuits
    1 dozen milk
    1 Primus stove
    1 30-30 Winchester rifle
  100 30-30 cartridges
  Candles, matches, pickaxe, hatchets
    1 sledge cover


THIRD SLEDGE:

    4 cases of dog pemmican
    2 cases of man pemmican
    7 tins of Hudson’s Bay pemmican
    1 Mannlicher rifle
  250 Mannlicher cartridges
    1 one-gallon tin of coal oil
    2 bottles of alcohol
  Pickaxe, hatchets, shovels, rope
  Sleeping-robes and personal outfit
    1 pair of ski
    1 pair of snowshoes
    1 sledge cover

To Mamen I gave a brief letter of instructions, concluding with this
paragraph: “Should you miss the trail and fail to connect with our
camp, after a reasonable time has been spent in looking it up, you will
go back to Wrangell Island and await my arriving there.”

The party got away at 9.30 A. M., accompanied for about five miles by
other members of the expedition to give them a good start. There was
a strong east wind, with drifting snow, but the weather cleared later
in the day and it grew calm in the evening. There was about four hours’
light a day now good for travelling.

Beyond its representation on our charts, we knew little about Wrangell
Island, the chief source of our information being a short section in
the American “Coast Pilot,” which read as follows: “This island was
first seen by the exploring party under the Russian Admiral Wrangell
and named after the leader, though he himself doubted its existence;
its southwestern point lies due North (_true_) 109 miles from Cape
North. It must have been known to the whalers, who, about the year
1849, commenced to visit this sea, and did so for many years in great
numbers. The _Jeannette’s_ people also saw it for many days in their
memorable drift northwestward; but the first person to land on it, of
which we have any authentic information, was Lieut. Hooper of the U.
S. S. _Corwin_ in 1881, and later in the same year it was explored by
parties from the U. S. S. _Rodgers_, these two vessels having been sent
to search for or obtain information concerning the _Jeannette_, the
remnant of whose crew were perishing in the delta of the Lena at the
very time this island was being explored.

“Wrangell Island is about 75 miles long E. N. W. and W. S. W., and
from 25 to 30 miles wide, not including the large bare sandspits which
extend a long way from the shore, as much as 12 miles in one place from
the northern side, and rather more near the southwestern corner of the
island. A range of hills extends completely round the coast, and a
lower range traverses the centre of the island from east to west, the
whole island in fact being a succession of hills, peaks and valleys.
The highest point appeared to be Berry peak, near the centre of the
island, about 2500 feet in height by barometric measurement.”

On the twenty-second I sent Chafe and Williams out to begin marking the
landward trail with empty pemmican tins. Pemmican has been the staple
article of food for polar expeditions for many years and contains, in
small compass, the essentials adequate to support life. It is put up by
various packing-houses, expressly for such needs as ours. I have lived
for a hundred and twenty days on pemmican, biscuit and tea and found
it amply sufficient. We had two kinds of pemmican; one, for ourselves,
consisting of beef, raisins, sugar and suet, all cooked together and
pressed, was packed in blue tins; the other, for the dogs, without the
raisins and sugar, in red tins.

I remember once, after a talk which I was giving on the North Pole
trip, a lady came up to me and inquired what pemmican was, which I
had mentioned several times. I explained what it was made of and what
it was used for. She thought for a moment and then said, “Well, what I
don’t understand is how you shoot them.”

Pemmican tins hold six pounds, marked so that you can tell how to take
out exactly a pound, which, with tea and a pound of biscuit, is the
standard daily ration per man. These tins are about fourteen inches
in length, five in width and three in thickness. We would open a tin
on one side and use up the contents; then we would open out the other
side and flatten them all down to make a sheet. Plastered against an
ice pinnacle to mark the trail or indicate a fault or the proximity of
open water, these red or blue sheets of tin were visible against their
white background for a mile and a half or two miles. This was one of
the many things which I learned on my expeditions with Peary. Mamen had
instructions to blaze his trail in this way so that he could find his
way back. Marking the trail from the camp landward would now give the
men training in ice travel.

We had something resembling the typical “January thaw” of the New
England winter on the twenty-third. The air seemed to have a touch of
springtime in it and there was open water about two miles to the south
of us.

The next day we improved the time in overhauling the house that we
had built out of boxes for the Eskimo, to make it more comfortable.
Later on I was in the supply tent when I heard a confused noise in the
galley. I waited a moment and then heard a tremendous racket of dishes
rattling down and equipment being upset. I hurried out of the tent and
into the galley. The canvas roof of the galley was on fire and parts
of the rafters near the funnel. It was a pitch roof and around the
funnel, where it passed through a hole in the roof, were a couple of
tin collars and some asbestos. The cook had the stove pretty hot and as
the canvas was dry and got overheated it had suddenly burst into flame.
He was waving his arms around and trying to put the fire out with water
and as he was very much in earnest about it he naturally did not always
look to see where he was going and bumped violently into whatever
happened to be in his way; hence the noise I had heard. A block of snow
soon had the fire out.

McKinlay found a box of cocoa the same day and played a joke on us.
When we were getting the emergency supplies overboard after the ship
was struck I had given instructions that no tobacco should be saved,
for I knew we could not afford to burden ourselves with a great supply
of it on our sledge journeys later on and so we might as well get used
to going without it as soon as possible. Some of the men happened to
have some with them when they left the ship, however, and we smoked
that while it lasted but it was already getting to be a scarce article.
A good many odds and ends were continually turning up under the snow,
however, and some of the men had an idea that if they looked for
tobacco they might find some. So McKinlay set out to investigate.

In due time he returned, saying nothing but looking as if he knew
something. We waited for him to hand over the tobacco or tell us where
it was and at last we became so aroused that we made him guide us to
the spot where he had been looking. He brought us to a place where a
box was covered up in the snow, dug it up and handed it over, while we
imagined the good smoke we were to have at last. It was a box of cocoa.
McKinlay had the time of his life about it and we all laughed with him,
though the joke was on us; I felt it incumbent on me, however, to show
the joker that he couldn’t trifle with our feelings with impunity, so I
chased him laughing over the ice and scrubbed his face in a snow-bank.

As a consolation prize I hunted through the supply tent for a little
tobacco which I knew was there among the dunnage; I finally found it,
divided it into small pieces and distributed it in that way to the
whole party.

The chief engineer found some more treasure—two coffee percolators
which were buried in the snow. When the cook tried to make coffee in
them, however, he found that they wouldn’t percolate.

Late in the day Chafe and Williams returned and reported no changes to
mark in the trail, so far as they went.




CHAPTER XIV

THE SUN COMES BACK


January 25 was a day of rejoicing, because it marked the return of
the sun, after seventy-one days. The sun was only rather indistinctly
visible, half a disc above the ice, to the south, at noon, but from now
on every day would be a little longer than the day before. It was the
fourth time I had seen the sun come back in the Arctic and this time
was the one which gave me the greatest satisfaction, because so much
depended on our getting good daylight.

We celebrated by a little feast and some good singing in the evening.
We had had a couple of cases of canned oysters on deck when the
_Karluk_ was struck and while I was waiting for the ship to go down
on the eleventh I had found two tins of these oysters in the galley;
the cook had brought them in to thaw them out. I threw the cases
over-board on the ice where they broke and scattered tins of oysters
around. We dug in the drifting snow and found this treasure trove and
on this evening we had the oysters in soup and otherwise, and then had
a “sing.”

It was a fine clear night outside, with little or no wind, the land
visible to the southwest and the temperature between thirty and forty
below zero. Gathered around the big stove in the box-house we went
through a varied and impromptu programme of song and recitation. Some
one recited “Casey at the Bat,” another “Lasca,” while Munro gave us
poems by Burns, of which he had a goodly store in his memory. With or
without the accompaniment of instrumental music on a comb, we sang
about every popular favorite, old and new: “Loch Lomond” and “The Banks
of the Wabash,” “The Heart Bowed Down” and “I Wonder Who’s Kissing Her
Now,” “Sweet Afton” and “The Devil’s Ball,” “I Dreamt I Dwelt in Marble
Halls” and “Maggie Murphy’s Home,” “Red Wing” (the favorite), “Aileen
Alana” (another favorite), “Put on Your Old Gray Bonnet,” “Alexander’s
Ragtime Band,” “The Wearing of the Green,” “Jingle Bells” (which might
have been appropriate if we had used the dog harness which we had with
bells on it and had ridden on the sledges instead of walking) and many
another song, good, bad or indifferent. The Eskimo woman sang hymns and
the little girl sang nursery songs, such as “Twinkle, Twinkle, Little
Star,” in which her mother joined.

It may be hard to believe but we were really enjoying ourselves these
days. We were comfortable in our quarters, with plenty to eat and no
lack of fuel. There was work to be done and all hands kept busily at
it, with no time to mope or indulge in vain regrets; sleep came easily
at the end of the day’s occupations and though we did not have each man
his private room and bath we had more soothing beds than I have slept
on in some hotels.

Every day we progressed in our preparations to make the landward
journey. On the twenty-sixth, for instance, in addition to the constant
round of packing and repacking, weighing this and measuring that, we
tested a couple of bell tents, which had been made on shipboard, to
see if they were all right for use later on. Each had a pole going up
through the middle; we found they were quite satisfactory and the men
used them afterwards to live in on Wrangell Island.

On the twenty-seventh we got a view of the whole sun above the horizon
and a good look at the land. In the half light of the previous days it
had varied in size from time to time like a mirage and we could not
tell whether it was Wrangell Island or not; now it seemed certain that
it was not Wrangell so it must be Herald, according to the chart, a
surmise which turned out to be correct.

“Herald Island,”—quoting again from the “Coast Pilot,”—“its highest
point about 38 miles E. N. E. from Wrangell Island, was discovered and
landed upon by Capt. Kellett of H. M. S. _Herald_, in 1849; it is about
4-1/2 miles long N. W. and S. E. and, being a solid mass of granite
about 900 feet high, is almost inaccessible. Lieut. Hooper, of the U.
S. S. _Corwin_, also landed on it, in 1881, and by barometer determined
the height of its highest peak, near the southeastern end, to be 1200
feet.”

Mr. Hadley and I got into an argument about something—I never could
recall just what it was—and bet a good dinner on it, payable when
we got to Victoria. I remember that I lost the bet but I still owe
it, because when we finally reached Victoria many months later we
had forgotten all about it! Mr. Hadley was one of our most valuable
members because he could do so many things of direct use to us in
our emergency. He was the oldest man of the party—fifty-seven—an
Englishman by birth, who had left England when a lad and been pretty
much all over the world, in a variety of occupations, which included a
term of enlistment in the United States navy.

I sent three men out on the twenty-eighth to see how the trail made by
the mate’s and Mamen’s parties was lasting; they returned late in the
day and reported an alteration and said that they had been unable to
pick up the trail again beyond the break. So the next day I sent them
out again, with Mr. Hadley. They succeeded in picking up the trail and
went as far as Mamen’s first outward camp, about twelve miles from our
main camp. I had told Mamen before he left that when it came near the
time when I should be expecting him back I would build a big bonfire
near Shipwreck Camp to guide him, one an hour before dark and another
an hour after dark. We now carried out this programme, using altogether
thirteen sacks of coal, a whaleboat and ten tins of gasoline. It gave
out a big smoke. At night we opened a drum of alcohol and burned the
canoe, besides three cases of gasoline.

January 30 was a beautiful day with little or no wind and a temperature
not much below zero. Chafe, Williams and Maurer walked to Mamen’s
second camp and an hour and a half beyond it, returning about half past
four to report that there were no alterations in the trail and that the
going was good. They put up a flag at the point where they turned back.
When the men went out on these short journeys over the ice they carried
some supplies with them to cache along the trail for future use.

The next day Malloch, who was watchman, looked at the chronometer
upside down so that the cook was late; he said that Malloch was his
friend! I had intended to send Mr. Hadley and a party away early to
go to Mamen’s third camp but he did not get off until ten o’clock;
with him were Chafe, Williams, Maurer and Breddy. The party returned
about six and reported that they did not reach the third camp but
found good going and believed the going good beyond; between Shipwreck
Camp and Mamen’s first camp the ice was shifting a little. They said
that they could see our bonfire four miles away over the ice. I was
getting anxious about Mamen, for I had surely looked to see him by the
twenty-seventh.

After the Hadley party had left, the doctor and Murray came to me and
asked for supplies for four men for fifty days, with a sledge, to go
to the land; they had been impatient to start for some time. I told
them that I should advise them to wait with the rest of us and make
the journey with us when the conditions, which were improving all the
time as the light grew stronger, were right for the final journey of
the whole party. They did not take kindly to my suggestion, however,
but felt that they would rather make the journey in their own way,
so I finally said that if they would sign an agreement absolving me
from all responsibility if they came to grief later on, I would give
them the supplies. They agreed to this. I told them, furthermore, that
if at any time they wanted to come back to camp and rejoin the main
party they would be perfectly welcome to do so, and that if they
required assistance later on I should be glad to do all in my power for
them. Their party was to consist of four—the doctor, Murray, Beuchat
and Sailor Morris. Morris went of his own accord, coming to me for
permission to do so; I felt that he would be of use to them because he
was a young man of twenty-six and handy, so I gave him the permission
he desired. I offered the doctor’s party their proportional share of
the dogs, as soon as the dogs returned with Mamen, but they declined
the offer, saying that they preferred to haul the sledge themselves.

The doctor’s party began at once on the work of getting ready for their
departure, assisted by McKinlay, who checked over their supplies with
them. At the same time Chafe and Williams were getting ready to leave
with a Peary sledge and four dogs to take supplies over Mamen’s trail
towards the land.




CHAPTER XV

THE RETURN OF MAMEN AND THE DEPARTURE OF THE DOCTOR’S PARTY


February 3 dawned fine and clear. There were a few narrow leads of
water near Shipwreck Camp; the ice was constantly cracking here and
there around us as the wind veered and changed in velocity and as we
were still drifting we heard many a crashing or grinding sound. Our own
floe was intact, but wherever the ice opened beyond the edges of the
floe the open water would make young ice again and this was not always
heavy enough to withstand the constantly recurring pressure.

At half past eight Chafe and Williams left with a Peary sledge, four
dogs and the following supplies, to leave at Mamen’s fourth camp: eight
tins of Hudson’s Bay pemmican, one case of Underwood dog pemmican, two
cases of biscuits, one case of coal oil, together with seventy days’
food for themselves and the dogs, a camping outfit, empty pemmican tins
and flags, to place on the ice rafters.

All day long we kept a lookout for Mamen and his two Eskimo. About
thirty yards away from the camp was a high rafter which we used as an
observatory; every now and then while it was light, I was in the habit
of going up there. Keruk, who was naturally anxious for the return of
her husband, used to go up there, too, and as she had good eyesight I
often asked her to go up and take a look.

Just before dark on the third—that is, about four o’clock—when we
were most of us indoors, sewing or getting ready for dinner, Breddy
came in and said that he believed Mamen was coming. We all rushed out.
Keruk was up on the rafter but it was already too dark to see far. I
could hear the dogs barking, however, and the voice of Kataktovick
shouting to them. It was glorious. I ran down the trail and met the
returning party coming along at a good pace. “Well done, Norway!” I
shouted, shaking Mamen’s hand and patting him on the back.

They came in to the camp, greeted with cheers, and we rushed them in
and filled them up with hot coffee and biscuit. It was about dinner
time and we put off dinner for about half an hour. The dogs, too, were
hungry but I was ready for them with some pemmican and seal meat all
cut up the day before and I fed them myself.

Nothing was said of their trip until after the men had had their
dinner; then Mamen related his experiences. They had made eleven
marches going in, until they were stopped by open water three miles
from land. He described the land which they saw and I made up my mind
that it was not Wrangell Island but Herald Island, a conjecture which
proved to be correct. They had had pretty good going, without the
trouble with open leads and raftered ice which we had when we made our
main journey later on.

They had reached the edge of the open water January 31 without untoward
incident, though one of their dogs had run away and King had frozen
his heel. Mamen and the Eskimo had stayed with the shore party a day
and had left on February 1 for their return to Shipwreck Camp. The
mate, he said, had decided to land as soon as the lead closed up; this
worried me a good deal because the mate and his party were not familiar
with travel over the young ice and, besides that, Herald Island is no
place for a party to land upon, for it is inaccessible, owing to its
precipitous sides, and, according to American government reports, has
no driftwood on its shores. In fact it has practically no shore to
speak of, excepting one short stretch; it is simply a rocky islet. Up
to the time when Mamen left there was no chance to land on the island
and Mamen hardly thought that the mate’s party would be able to land
there. I hoped that they would keep on to Wrangell Island and carry out
their instructions.

Mamen’s journey back to camp was much faster than the shoreward
journey, because they had more light and could sleep in the igloos
they had built going in. The last day back they had made a wonderful
march, leaving their igloo at the earliest twilight and coming all day;
they had not even stopped to eat since they had broken camp. They had
relieved each other at driving the dogs.

As soon as they got their clothing well dried out, I decided to send
Mamen and the Eskimo back to the island to locate the mate’s party. At
the same time they could move supplies along the trail, for now that
the road was made, the going would be easier.

The evening of the fourth Murray came to me and said that the doctor’s
party planned to leave the next day. The fifth opened clear and calm
and the doctor, Murray, Beuchat and Morris got away about nine o’clock,
hauling their sledge-load of supplies along the trail.

Later on Chafe and Williams got in. They had landed their supplies
safely at the fourth camp and set to work at once, drying out their
clothing and, with the help of all the rest of us, preparing for the
next shoreward trip. On the way back to the camp they had passed the
doctor and his companions, all in good spirits and looking forward to
any but the unhappy fate that was to overtake them.

Before the doctor’s party left they handed me the following letter:

  CANADIAN ARCTIC EXPEDITION,
  Sunday, Feb. 1st, 1914.

  _Captain Robert Bartlett_,

 SIR: We, the undersigned, in consideration of the present critical
 situation, desire to make an attempt to reach the land. We ask you
 to assist us by issuing to us from the general stores all necessary
 sledging and camping provisions and equipment for the proposed
 journey as per separate requisition already handed to you. On the
 understanding that you do so and continue as heretofore to supply us
 with our proportional share of provisions while we remain in camp,
 and in the event of our finding it necessary to return to the camp,
 we declare that we undertake the journey on our own initiative and
 absolve you from any responsibility whatever in the matter.

  A. FORBES MACKAY
  JAMES MURRAY
  H. BEUCHAT
  S. S. MORRIS

[Illustration: LETTER FROM THE DOCTOR’S PARTY TO CAPTAIN BARTLETT]

Their supplies consisted of the following: one Nome sledge, one
Burberry tent, 96 pounds of Underwood pemmican, 112 pounds of Hudson’s
Bay pemmican, 138 pounds of biscuit, four tins of Horlick’s malted
milk, 30 pounds of sugar, four boxes of tabloid tea, 16 tins of
cocoa, 52 cakes of chocolate, six gallons of coal oil, one quart
of alcohol, one Primus stove and outfit, four mugs, four spoons, one
spade, one ice axe, one hatchet, one Mannlicher rifle and 100 rounds
of ammunition, 20 yards of rope, one dozen candles, one package of
matches, five pounds of butter, one tent floor and a tracing of
Wrangell Island from the chart. These supplies were sufficient for
fifty days.

The cook was up at four on the morning of the seventh and we
breakfasted at half past five. At 6:15 Chafe and Williams left for
the fifth camp with a sledge-load of supplies, consisting of 96
pounds of Underwood pemmican, 80 pounds of Hudson’s Bay pemmican, one
case of oil, seven days’ food for themselves and their dogs and a
camping outfit. At seven Mamen and the two Eskimo got away, with three
sledges and seventeen dogs. Their sledges were loaded with four cases
of Underwood man pemmican, three cases of dog pemmican, each case
containing forty-eight pounds, three cases of oil, ten cases of biscuit
and 256 pounds of Hudson’s Bay pemmican; they were to pick up supplies
enough at the fourth camp to give them 1800 pounds’ weight for their
three sledges. They were then to go on and look for the mate’s party
and leave one sledge and the supplies as far in as they could along the
trail, bringing back the other two sledges light.

Mamen could report on the condition of the trail and keep it open and
at the same time carry out the essential part of my plan of getting the
supplies well along towards the land in advance of the main party. If
he should fail to find the mate’s party, the assumption was that they
had gone on to Wrangell Island.

At 2 P.M. Mamen came back to the camp; with him was Williams. When
some distance along the way Mamen had dislocated his knee-cap, which
had already been dislocated when he was ski-jumping in Norway. He had
been going on, however, in spite of his accident, when he met Chafe and
Williams returning. Williams had fallen through the young ice about
four miles out and they had decided to return so that he could get his
clothing dried out, when they met Mamen. The latter had told Chafe of
his accident and it was decided that he and Williams should come back
to camp while Chafe took over the command of Mamen’s party and went on
towards the island.

I was busy about the camp when I heard them coming. I knew that
something must be wrong and went out to meet them. Mamen was riding on
the sledge and Williams was running to keep warm, for the temperature
was about thirty-five degrees below zero and he had got pretty wet
in getting out of the water. I rushed them into the box-house where
Williams had some hot tea and changed his clothes. Then I sent him,
with the chief engineer, to overtake Chafe and continue on the
shoreward journey.

Williamson, the second engineer, worked over Mamen’s knee, massaged
it and finally got the knee-cap back into place. It was hard work
because it kept slipping out of the socket and had to be bandaged with
surgeon’s plaster to keep it in place. In fact it was not until the
tenth that Mamen got so that he could hobble around and the dislocation
was very painful.

Sunday, the eighth, I took stock of our pemmican and found that we had
4,932 pounds left in camp; we had used up and sledged along the trail
some 5,000 pounds. We ate no pemmican in camp, and fed the dogs mostly
on seal meat excepting when on the march. Most of the dogs were now
out and we had in camp only those which were crippled or otherwise
incapacitated.

Shortly after noon on the ninth Mr. Munro and Williams came in. They
had been held up by open water between the second and third camps and
had been unable to overtake Chafe and the Eskimo. The next day they had
started on the march again, only to be held up again by open water;
late in the afternoon, however, the ice had closed up so that they
could go on to the fifth camp. Here they could not find a heavy enough
floe to build a cache on so they had returned and put off the load at
the fourth camp, which was on a large heavy floe, an ideal place for a
cache.

Munro left camp again early on the morning of the eleventh, with
Malloch, four dogs, seven cases of pemmican, a camping outfit and food
for seven days. They were to go beyond the fifth camp and leave the
pemmican at the best place they could find. The temperature was 38
degrees below zero, the weather fine and clear.

The next day, however, was dull and cloudy, with a fresh northeast wind
and a falling barometer. It looked as if our fine weather would soon be
over and I feared that the different parties out on the trail would be
storm-bound. Towards night the wind came on strong east, and continued
so through the following day; I was sorry to see this for we should
be set towards the west if it continued. The next day, however, was a
beautiful day; the air was clear and frosty, with little or no wind.
The land was distinctly visible and I thought I could see Wrangell
Island to the southwest. It was St. Valentine’s Day and Bob, the cook,
sent two of the men valentines of soup advertisements.

About noon the chief engineer and Malloch came in. They were in a sorry
condition. They had spent a most uncomfortable night walking about on
the ice to keep warm, for late in the afternoon while trying to make
quick time they got on to some thin ice and Munro broke through. The
sledge began to sink but fortunately Munro got out all right and they
held the sledge up long enough to cut the pemmican away. The pemmican
was, of course, all lost and their clothes and camping outfit were
saturated. The stove was damaged in the accident and they had nothing
to warm themselves with. We got them fixed up at once and then cleaned
off the sledge and loaded it again, for Breddy and Maurer were to go to
the fourth camp the next day.

It was my turn to be watchman that night and I spent a good part of the
time studying the chart. From our present position Herald Island seemed
to be about sixty miles away.

Breddy and Maurer left on the fifteenth with seven cases of pemmican to
go over the trail to the fourth camp.

The next afternoon at four o’clock Chafe and the Eskimo came in. They
were heartily welcomed. Chafe reported that he got to a point within
three miles of Herald Island when he was held up by open water. In fact
for two days he and his party were adrift on a small sheet of ice in a
three-mile lead. They were close enough to the island to see the land
clearly and in detail but though he looked constantly with binoculars
he could see no one on the island nor any tent or other indication that
men were there, so he concluded that the mate and his party had carried
out their orders and gone on to Wrangell Island. This seemed likely
to me and I hoped that it was so. The Eskimo had improved the time in
shooting and succeeded in getting four seal.

On the way back the trail was faulted in places and the party had
difficulty in finding it. When about twenty miles from Herald Island
on their return trip they had come upon the Mackay party, struggling
towards the land. Mackay, Murray and Morris were drawing the sledge;
Beuchat was a mile and a half behind, with hands and feet frozen and
partly delirious from suffering. Morris had cut his left hand with a
knife and blood-poisoning had already set in. Chafe’s opinion was that
Beuchat would die that night. He said that Beuchat expressed his sorrow
that he had left the main party. The Mackay party had taken their
pemmican out of the tins before they left Shipwreck Camp and put it all
in a bag; in going over some young ice their sledge had got into the
water and the bag of pemmican had got wet. Altogether they were in bad
shape. Chafe offered them assistance. They declined it and said they
were bound for Wrangell Island. They did accept some seal meat which
Chafe had. Munro and Malloch had spoken the Mackay party earlier on
their march and so had Chafe himself, when he had first started out,
but their condition had then been good, though they had been making
slow progress, and each party had tried to persuade them to return to
Shipwreck Camp.

Chafe reported that he had left all his supplies at the sixth camp,
excepting just enough to take him back to Shipwreck Camp. He had lost
one dog and had had to leave a broken sledge along the way.

Maurer and Breddy came in soon after Chafe arrived; they reported that
they had left their load safely at the fourth camp. All hands, except
the four men of the mate’s party and the four of the doctor’s, were now
assembled once more at Shipwreck Camp.

It was a severe disappointment to me not to have word of the safety of
the mate and his party. I had thought that they might possibly return
with Chafe and be with us on our final march to the island which I was
now planning to get under way at once.

We had a northeast gale on the seventeenth which continued for many
days. On the seventeenth and eighteenth we had all hands hard at work,
drying out clothing and getting sledges and equipment ready for the
march. There was a pronounced drift westerly so that on the eighteenth
Herald Island bore southeast by south, half south.




CHAPTER XVI

OVER THE ICE TOWARDS WRANGELL ISLAND


On the morning of February 19, I called the cook at four o’clock, so
that we had an early breakfast for the start of the advance guard.

There were two parties, each with a sledge and four dogs. In the first
party were Malloch, Hadley, Williamson and Breddy; in the second Munro,
Maurer, Williams and Chafe. Each party would have man-harness to help
out the dogs when necessary.

On the first party’s sledge were six cases of man pemmican, two
cases of biscuit, two gallons of oil, 84 tins of milk, 2,400 tea
tablets in tins hermetically sealed, one Mannlicher rifle, 250 rounds
of ammunition, one Ross revolver (Malloch’s own), 400 rounds of
ammunition, one Primus stove, one gallon of alcohol, 500 22-calibre
cartridges, one 401 Winchester, 100 rounds of ammunition, one pair of
ski, matches, a pickaxe, hatchets, sleeping-robes and a tent. On the
other sledge were five cases of man pemmican, two cases of biscuit,
84 tins of milk, two gallons of oil, one gallon of alcohol, 2,400
tea tablets, one Primus stove, one Mannlicher rifle, 250 rounds of
ammunition, matches, pick-axe, hatchets, a tent, snow-shoes and a
tracing of the map of Wrangell Island. Every man had a new suit of
Jaeger underwear given him. The parties were to pick up supplies along
the trail so that they would thus be replacing supplies used on the
march, and take full loads with them in to the land. For this march
was to take these eight men clear through to Wrangell Island and they
were saying good-by to Shipwreck Camp for good. The men shook hands all
around and got away about eight o’clock in the morning.

On one of the sledges they had a passenger. While we were fitting out
the ship at the navy yard at Esquimault, some one presented us with
a cat, as black as the ace of spades. She was kept in the forecastle
at first; after a while she got aft and Mr. Hadley became greatly
interested in her, training her to do tricks. When the ship was crushed
and we were working to get things out of her before she sank I told
the men to be sure not to forget the cat, but to put her in a basket
and place her in the box-house. There she became very much at home.
Early in her residence she got into difficulties with a dog, that had
wandered through the entrance, by landing suddenly like an animated
bunch of porcupine quills on the dog’s nose. The dog shook her off and
tried to take his revenge. We saved the cat just in time. After that
she never bothered the dogs again. When the advance party now started
for the land Hadley and Maurer made a deer-skin bag to carry the cat
and she rode on a sledge in state. Her food consisted chiefly of
pemmican scraps.

With the rest of the party and all the supplies we could carry, I had
intended to start the day after the earlier party. Kerdrillo, however,
was in no condition to travel. He had hurt his back going in to Herald
Island and it gave him a good deal of pain, so it seemed wise to wait
until he was better. We had two lame dogs and the delay on account of
Kerdrillo would give them, too, a chance to recuperate. Ice travel
is as hard on dogs as on men and, besides that, the dogs were always
fighting among themselves, if they were not sharply watched, and one of
them had so bad a tear in his leg that Mamen had to take nine stitches
in it, using the regulation surgical needle and silk thread. We had
twelve dogs left besides Nellie, one of the dogs that had had pups. We
had built a snow-house for her and her pups, but as it was clear that
the pups would not be of service to us now, we had to have them killed
to save Nellie’s strength. She improved enough to be of value later on.

For several days while we waited we had a high easterly gale and
snowdrift. I wondered how the eight men of the advance guard were
getting along and what they thought had become of the rest of us.
Daily I had to rub poor Kerdrillo’s back and put plasters on it. His
improvement was slow but fortunately his condition was not the only bar
to our immediate departure, for the weather was too bad for efficient
travel and it was far better for us to be eating supplies in camp
where we had plenty than to be consuming them detained by the storm
in some igloo along the trail. We fed the dogs seal meat, for we had
several seal left, and also pemmican, for we still had plenty of that,
and I was feeding the dogs all they would eat, to get them in as good
condition as possible for the final march. This would be continuous
travel with little sleep and now, on account of the storm, hard going
and extra work in locating the trail.

The Eskimo occupied some of their time in camp fitting up harpoons
and spears to save ammunition. They also put our snowshoes in good
condition and spliced hatchet-handles on to the handles of the
snow-knives so that they could wield them better in cutting out
snow-blocks for igloos.

The supply-tent was all snowed under, but by digging around I succeeded
in getting out a few things that I wanted. We all had a shave and a
bath and changed our underclothing. I used a fork to comb my hair for
I had given my comb to Keruk; it is surprising what an excellent comb a
fork makes,—I recommend it for Arctic use.

There was just a little tobacco left. Mamen found a small piece of
chewing-tobacco under the boards. Keruk, whom we all called “Auntie,”
had a little and when I wanted tobacco I would ask Auntie for a pipeful.

On the twenty-third the storm was breaking at last. Huge banks of
snow were piled high around the camp; we were all snowed in. The two
crippled dogs were in the box-house with us; the other dogs were in
the snow-igloo, which had been occupied by the men who had now gone to
the land. It took us nearly all day on the twenty-third to dig our way
through the snow from the box-house to the igloo in order to feed the
dogs. We dug the supply tent out and busied ourselves getting ready for
our departure. In fact we stayed up all night, giving the final touches
to our clothing.

At 4 A.M. on February twenty-fourth we had coffee and began loading
our sledges. As soon as Kerdrillo’s sledge, a remodeled Nome sledge,
was loaded I started him off. With him went his wife and their two
children, and Templeman, the cook. Keruk carried her baby, Mugpi,
on her back all the way to Wrangell Island; the older girl covered
the entire distance on foot, sometimes even helping her father with
the sledge. Kerdrillo had five dogs. His sledge was loaded with four
cases of man pemmican, forty-eight tins of milk, two tins of biscuit,
one case of oil, 2,400 tea tablets, in hermetically sealed tins, one
30.30 Winchester rifle, 200 rounds of ammunition, one tent, one Primus
stove, one axe, two pickaxes, candles, a gallon of alcohol, matches,
snow-knives and sleeping robes.

The rest of us had two sledges, one with three dogs, driven by
Kataktovick, the other with four dogs, driven by myself. On
Kataktovick’s sledge were three cases of man pemmican, thirty-six
cases of milk, two cases of biscuit, ten gallons of oil and 2,400 tea
tablets. My own sledge carried four cases of man pemmican, two cases of
biscuit, thirty-six cases of milk, twelve tins of coal oil, 2,400 tea
tablets, one tent, matches, one Primus stove, one axe, two pickaxes,
candles, snow-knives, one gallon of alcohol, one pair of snowshoes,
one pair of ski, one Mannlicher rifle, 250 rounds of ammunition, one
Colt revolver, 100 rounds of ammunition, sleeping-robes, rope and spare
harness. We had to leave a Peary sledge in camp because there were not
dogs enough to make a team to haul it. As it was, our three sledges,
with their four-hundred-pound loads, were heavily burdened for the dogs
we had, with some of them in a half-crippled condition.

[Illustration:

 _Photograph copyrighted, 1914, by Lomen Bros., Nome_

MUGPI

“Keruk carried her baby, Mugpi, on her back all the way to Wrangell
Island.” _See page 141_]

At about noon we finally got away—Kataktovick, McKinlay, Mamen and
I. McKinlay, wearing man-harness, helped pull my sledge, while I
guided and drove the dogs. On account of his dislocated knee-cap which
bothered him constantly and once on the march got out of place and
had to be put back, with strenuous efforts on my part and much silent
suffering on his, Mamen could not help pull Kataktovick’s sledge but
had to limp alongside and make his way as best he could. He chafed very
much over his temporary uselessness and I had to cheer him up as well
as I could by telling him constantly what wonderful work he had already
accomplished.

We placed a record in a copper tank on the ice, telling where the ship
was lost and when we left camp, with the names of the members of the
various parties as they had left. In camp and on the ice we left behind
us two transits, about 3,000 pounds of pemmican, 80 cases of biscuit,
200 sacks of coal, ten cases of gasoline, two drums of coal oil, with
various odds and ends; over the camp we left the British ensign flying.
I had my charts with me. On the day we left, on account of a sudden
clearing up of the atmosphere and a temporary cessation of the almost
continuous whirling snowdrift, I had a good view of Wrangell Island,
the first sure view I had had of it.

We had reached a point beyond the second camp by nightfall. Here we
stopped. We had intended to make the third camp, but it was getting
very dark, we had been up all the previous night, had worked hard all
day and were very tired, so we were forced to pitch our tents and had
to spend a miserable night under canvas. The tent was not large enough
for us, yet all four of us occupied it and our breathing filled it
with condensation. Our dogs, too, were rather sluggish the first day
out, for they had been well stuffed with food during the time of our
enforced delay in camp.

We welcomed daylight the next morning and turned out at four o’clock,
and after our standard ration of tea, biscuit and pemmican, were
soon on the march. All hands were glad to be off and the dogs, too,
worked better than on the first day, so we made good progress. In most
places the road had been destroyed by the storm of the past few days,
so the work of the preliminary sledging parties was of little use to
us, though sometimes we could make out where the trail led; chiefly,
however, we had to make our own way, guided by the empty pemmican tins
and flags, where these still stayed up, and by the sight of Wrangell
Island to the southwest. We managed to keep the general direction of
the travelled road from camp to camp, though it often took time and
care to study out the way to go.

[Illustration: SHIPWRECK CAMP

“We placed a record in a copper tank on the ice, telling where the ship
was lost and when we left camp, with the names of the members of the
various parties as they had left.... Over the camp we left the British
ensign flying.” _See page 143_]

At the fourth camp I found a note from Munro saying that they had been
held up there by open water and a heavy gale, the same, evidently,
which had detained us at Shipwreck Camp, and that they had shot a polar
bear near by. This I knew even before I read the note for I found a big
piece of bear-meat that they had left in the igloo for us. They had
been unable to take all the pemmican at the cache here along with them;
we picked up a few tins of it but could not take any more, for we were
already overburdened.

Munro’s note further said that the trail beyond was badly smashed
but we went on as fast as we could, for we wanted to catch up with
Kerdrillo and I was anxious to know that the advance party was
continuing to get along well. At quarter past four we reached the sixth
igloo. These camps were from four to ten miles apart. We found at this
camp five gallons of oil, which the advance party left, three cases of
pemmican, four cases of biscuit and some alcohol. There should have
been another cache near by but the ice had raftered under pressure of
the recent storm and destroyed it, thereby losing us a lot of biscuit
and pemmican, and, what was just then even more valuable, perhaps,
twelve gallons of oil.


At half past four we finally came up with Kerdrillo and his party. We
had made the thirty miles from Shipwreck Camp to the sixth camp in two
days, going twelve the first day and eighteen the second. Kerdrillo and
his family were already occupying the igloo at this camp so we built
another for ourselves.

In building a snow-igloo the first thing to do is to find a level
place where the ice is heavy and will not crack; it is of course not
always possible to find the ideal spot and you have to be content
with the heaviest ice you can find and take your chances. The snow
should be hard and firmly packed. You start in cutting blocks of snow
with a snow-knife, an implement which has a steel blade about a foot
and a half long, two inches wide and a sixteenth of an inch thick,
with a wooden handle about six inches long, an inch and a half wide
and a quarter of an inch thick; we had lengthened the handles of our
snow-knives by lashing hatchet-handles to them, as I have already
mentioned, so that we could use both hands in wielding them. Sometimes
instead of a snow-knife we would use an ordinary hand-saw in cutting
the blocks out; we could often do more work with this than with a
snow-knife. The Eskimo in the distant past used to use a knife made of
stone or bone.

The size of the snow-blocks varied. For the lower tiers of the walls
of the igloo we used blocks as large as could be cut without breaking;
for the upper tiers the size was somewhat smaller, tapering off to the
roof. The blocks varied in thickness from a foot and a half to two
feet, according to the condition of the snow. A properly completed
igloo is round, with a conical roof which requires considerable skill
and practice to make. It took our Eskimo a long time, however, to cover
in the roof, so we used to use the tent we had with us for the roof,
with our snowshoes and ski for a tent-pole. Our igloos were square
instead of round. Inside we would build a bed-platform of snow, large
enough for us all to sleep on; we would place our fur sleeping-robes on
this platform and lie down to sleep. We slept in our clothes, with no
covering over us; it is not safe to use sleeping-bags on the sea-ice
for when the ice cracks underneath you, the sleeping-bags hobble your
arms and legs and you drown. We never caught cold; in fact “colds” and
pneumonia do not exist in the Arctic beyond the limit of habitation of
civilized man.

When we got our igloo built we would make a half-circular opening in
one of the sides and crawl in; then we would fill up this opening with
a snow-block, cut down to fit it tightly enough to make it air-proof.
For ventilation we had small holes punched in the walls. Once inside
we would light our Primus stove and make our tea, eat our biscuit and
pemmican by candlelight, lie down and go to sleep.

We were not ordinarily troubled with insomnia, but sometimes, like a
peaceful community the night before the Fourth, we were kept awake
in spite of ourselves. Between ten and eleven on the night of the
twenty-fifth, for instance, the ice began to crack in the vicinity
of our camp and from time to time we in our igloo would feel severe
shocks, as of an earthquake. Through the snow walls I could hear the
Eskimo out on the ice. Kataktovick went out to see what was up and came
back at once to tell me that a crack two or three feet wide had opened
through the middle of Kerdrillo’s igloo, which was about five yards
away from ours, and that they had nearly lost their little baby but
fortunately had got out before anything happened to them.

The ice continued to crack about us all through the night. There was no
crack in our igloo so I gave it to Keruk and her children for the rest
of the night and we walked back and forth, waiting for daylight. It was
not very dark for the stars were shining brilliantly. The temperature
was about forty below zero. All around us the ice was breaking and at
times we were on a floating island.

[Illustration: ANOTHER VIEW OF SHIPWRECK CAMP]

As soon as daylight came I sent McKinlay and Kataktovick, with all
the dogs and an empty sledge, back to Shipwreck Camp for about thirty
gallons of the oil that we had left there. They had all the dogs from
the three sledges and could make good progress.

While McKinlay and Kataktovick were gone Kerdrillo and I went on a
scouting tour ahead for a way to see how the road looked. We found that
the storm had destroyed the old trail and that the trail newly made
by the Munro-Hadley party was already changed somewhat, though as yet
not very much. While we were on this scout Kerdrillo caught a glimpse,
through our binoculars, of two men of the advance party, just visible
against the sky-line on a high rafter eight or ten miles away. When we
came back to camp, I had Kerdrillo build another igloo for his party.
During the day the ice had all closed up again.

About half past three the next afternoon McKinlay and Kataktovick
returned from Shipwreck Camp, with thirty gallons of oil, two tins of
alcohol, twelve sealskins, a few fawnskins and 6,000 tea tablets. They
said that both ways they had found our trail unaltered; apparently the
only movement of the ice had been at the sixth camp, where we were.




CHAPTER XVII

THROUGH THE PRESSURE RIDGE


At dawn the next morning, February 28, leaving at this sixth camp
some cases of biscuits, with alcohol and coal oil, we started again
landward, going over the trail made by the advance party. At one P.
M. we came up with them. They were halted by a huge conglomeration of
raftered ice tossed up by the storm which had delayed us at Shipwreck
Camp. The rafters were from twenty-five to a hundred feet high and ran
directly across our path, parallel to the land, and extending in either
direction as far as the eye could reach. Viewed from an ice pinnacle
high enough to give a clear sight across in the direction of the land
the mass of broken ice looked to be at least three miles wide. To get
around it was clearly out of the question; an attempt to do so might
lead us no one knew whither. Clearly it was a case for hard labor, to
build a road across it practicable for sledging; I had seen similar
apparently impassible ice on our polar trips but never anything worse.
At three o’clock, therefore, I told all hands to set to work building
igloos and said that to-morrow we would begin with pickaxes to make a
road across the rafters. While they were building the igloos I made a
reconnaissance ahead for some distance, returning about dark. We had
no thermometer, so that we could not tell the exact temperature, but
from the condition of the coal oil, which was very thick and viscid,
it must have been between forty-five and fifty-five below zero. It was
excellent weather for sledging, fine, clear and calm, if the going had
only been good.

March 1, at daylight, I sent back Chafe and Mamen, with an empty
sledge and ten dogs, to bring up all the oil, biscuit and alcohol that
remained at the sixth camp. They returned with a well-laden sledge,
late in the afternoon. I discovered during the day that Malloch and
Maurer had frozen their feet, a thing which caused them a good deal
of suffering and me a good deal of anxiety. Men with frozen feet are
seriously handicapped and make the progress of all difficult until they
recover. Fortunately in the present instance the men made known their
predicament soon enough to be relieved before dangerously frost-bitten.

At daylight the next morning I sent McKinlay, Hadley and Chafe back
over the trail again, to go clear through to Shipwreck Camp with an
empty sledge and fourteen dogs. They were to bring back the Peary
sledge that we had left there and full loads of pemmican, biscuit and
tea.

Our work at road-making which we had begun the day before, was
progressing steadily. It was cold, seemingly endless labor, for almost
every foot of the trail had to be hewn out of the ice to make a path
three or four feet wide, smoothed off enough to permit our sledges
to be drawn over it without being smashed. By three o’clock in the
afternoon we had got over the first big chain of ridges and on to a
small level floe. We were still far from the other side of the great
rafters but by working diligently could feel that we had accomplished
something at last. We worked on a little too long before starting back
to camp and darkness was almost upon us. So I asked the cook to go back
to camp while the rest of us were finishing our day’s work and tell
Keruk and Malloch and Maurer that we were coming and wanted to have
hot tea ready for us as soon as we got back. Malloch and Maurer had
been compelled by their frozen feet to rest for the time being, though
they insisted that they be allowed to do their share of the work and I
almost had to use force to keep them quiet.

The rest of us finally knocked off work and made our way back over
the rather tortuous road but when we reached camp no preparations
had been made to give us our much-needed tea and on inquiry I found
that Templeman had not turned up. It was now almost dark and I was a
good deal concerned about his absence, for though a splendid cook and
as willing a worker as a man could be, he was not strong enough to
withstand for very long the hardships that would surround him if he
were lost on the ice. I set out to look for him and we fired off guns
and shouted and altogether made all the noise we could to attract his
attention. Finally to my great relief I saw him floundering through
the snow on a big floe about a quarter of a mile from the camp. My
revulsion of feeling was like that of an anxious parent who thinks his
youngster has gone off and got lost and then discovers him making his
way homeward. In the parable the prodigal son receives the fatted calf;
in practice I fear that most errant youngsters receive a sound spanking
and perhaps do not suspect until years later that this disguises
a tremendous feeling of joy, which expresses itself perversely in
punishment for recklessness and warnings “never to do it again.” So
when I espied poor Templeman my first impulse was to berate him soundly
for wandering from the narrow, though none too straight, path back
to camp but when I got near enough to see that he was wading through
snow, into which he sank to the waist at every step, and had had the
good sense to keep his pickaxe with him, though he was by this time
barely able to carry it, my heart smote me and I relented. Templeman
said he was sorry he had gone astray but that he had really wanted to
do a little scouting by himself. That is the worst temptation in the
Arctic; when you send a man out by himself he may go astray and when he
realizes that he has lost his way, instead of attempting to retrace his
steps, he continues on. I was delighted to see Templeman and to know
that he was safely with us again.

At daylight the next morning the chief engineer and I began sledging
supplies over the road already built from the camp to the level floe
in the midst of the rafters. The rest of the party continued the
road-building beyond the floe. We made three trips, with two sledges
and eight dogs, and made a good beginning at the transportation of our
supplies on the way towards land. We saw several bear tracks and some
seal holes in the ice. I sent Kerdrillo and Kataktovick on through the
rafters, to report on ice conditions; they found that the going got
better as they got further across the rafters which, where we were
working, were like a small mountain range. Building a road across them
was like making the Overland Trail through the Rockies.

I have always regretted that I took no photographs here but somehow
when the light was good enough and I had the time, my camera would be
back in camp and when I had my camera with me we would be on the march
and I had no time to play photographer. Taking pictures was no sinecure
on this trip, anyway, because the cold seemed to affect the shutter
and the unrolling of the films. If George Borup had been with us as
he was with Peary on our North Pole trip, what a great collection of
photographs he could have taken!

March 4, at about four P. M., we finished working through the rafter
and came out on the smoother ice on its landward side. Mamen,
Kataktovick and I spent the day sledging supplies across from the camp
on the farther side and when the road was finished we all went back
for the last load. It was not until eight P. M. that we had all our
supplies at the new camp and we had to do the last of the work in the
dark; the Eskimo had built three igloos while we were sledging. It
had taken us four days to get across a distance of three miles. From
the shore side it was easy to see the basis of the formation of such
rafters. A storm causes the moving ice to smash against and slide over
the still ice and the pressure of the “irresistible force meeting the
immovable body” throws the ice into fantastic, mountainous formations
that are as weird as that astounding picture of Chaos before the
Creation that used to ornament the first volume of Ridpath’s “History
of the World.”

At daylight on March 5 I sent Munro and a party back across the three
miles of raftered ice to meet the McKinlay party who were about due
back from Shipwreck Camp. Munro and the others could guide and help
them across the difficult road we had made. While they were gone I took
Kataktovick and laid out a trail towards the land for the next day’s
march. Now for the first time since we left Shipwreck Camp, we got a
view of Wrangell Island; it was high and we seemed almost under it. The
air was exceptionally clear and the land looked close to us.

Munro and his party did not get back until long after dark. They had
reached our last camp across the raftered ice and not finding McKinlay
and the others there had continued on the back trail, hoping to meet
them. They went on as far as they could go without being compelled
to stay out all night, and then came back, because they had no
sleeping-robes and would have had a poor night of it, besides being
obliged to build an igloo. They were wise in knowing when they had gone
far enough; Munro showed his usual good judgment.

Our progress in to the island was retarded by the necessity of keeping
along with us as large a quantity of supplies as possible. This
meant relaying supplies, because the going was bad and made sledging
difficult, with the small number of dogs we had. On the sixth, as soon
as the first streak of light appeared, I sent Munro and his party
back again to meet the McKinlay party, while I took Kataktovick and
Kerdrillo and went ahead towards the island, road-making with our
pickaxes. Munro had told me that when he first saw the three-mile belt
of raftered ice, he never thought for a moment that we should ever get
through it. Any novice certainly had a right to feel discouraged; it
was as tough a job as I ever tackled. We now picked our way—I might
almost say pick-axed our way—across the ice from our last camp for a
distance of seven miles until we came to a large, heavy floe, which
would make a good place for a new camp; here we threw off the light
loads which we had brought on two of the Peary sledges and returned to
camp. At half past four the McKinlay party came in, convoyed by Munro
and his party. McKinlay and his companions had gone clear back to
Shipwreck Camp and brought in six cases of dog pemmican, sixteen cases
of Hudson’s Bay pemmican, thirty gallons of gasoline, and some hatchets
and snow-knives. They had left at the first camp from Shipwreck Camp
four cases of Underwood dog pemmican and ten tins of Hudson’s Bay
pemmican, for they already had too heavy loads to bring them.

They said that the day before, as the darkness was coming on, they had
come to the conclusion that they would be unable to reach the big camp
near the raftered ice before night, so they had decided to stop where
they were and build an igloo, while there was still light enough to
see. They were busily at work, cutting out snow-blocks and piling them
up, when suddenly three bears came upon them, evidently the same ones
whose tracks we had seen on our march. One of the bears got between
them and the sledge which bore their rifles. They made noise enough,
however, to frighten this bear and start all three running away; then
they sprang for their rifles and shot the bears on the run.

The next morning, therefore, I sent McKinlay, Hadley and Mamen back
to bring up the bear meat. The rest of us sledged supplies along
the shoreward way, Kataktovick and I walking on ahead to blaze the
trail. We had a continuation of the fine weather and low temperature.
I suppose it was about forty or fifty below zero. We sledged a good
part of the supplies along to the new camp on the big floe and built
igloos there. The next day we continued the work, Kataktovick picking
the trail. At first it was rough going but after a time it became a
little better and we moved all our supplies ten miles nearer the land,
returning to the igloos on the big floe for the night. We found that
at one of the temporary caches along the way two bears had destroyed a
case of coal oil and scattered two tins of biscuit over the ice.

It was hard luck, after getting the oil so near the island, to have
bears to contend with in addition to the elements, especially as our
dogs were not trained to follow a bear, so that there was no use trying
to go after them. A polar bear has a very acute sense of smell and can
scent a human being in plenty of time to get away from him, and as a
bear can go faster than a man it can escape easily, unless the hunter
has dogs trained from puppy-hood to follow a bear and round him up,
the way the dogs of Greenland can do. Of the bears that the McKinlay
party shot the meat was simply cut off the bones, to have no useless
weight to carry and some of it was cached on the ice, with the skins,
and the rest brought with us. We expected to be able to get it later on
but never did because we did not go back over the trail again, and we
expected to get more bears on our way to the island.

On the tenth we kept up the task of sledging the supplies forward. We
worked from daylight to dark, some with pickaxes, others with sledges
with light loads, for the going was rough. The Eskimo built the igloos
and by night we had all our supplies up, Munro, Mamen and myself
getting in with the last load just at dark.

The going was bad nearly all the way along here. Kataktovick and I
were off at the first crack of dawn picking the trail for the others
to follow with their pickaxes and their lightly loaded sledges. It was
necessary for us to make fairly good loads, for a white man can not
handle a sledge as deftly as an Eskimo can and we had not enough Eskimo
to drive all the sledges even if they had been free from the work of
trail-making and building igloos.

We made about seven miles during the day. Sometimes we had to get the
sledges up on a ridge fifty feet high with an almost sheer drop on the
other side. When we came to such rough places we would harness all the
dogs to a sledge and all of us who could get a hand on it would help
push the sledge. When we got the sledge up to the top we would run a
rope from it to another sledge down below and as the first sledge went
down the other side it would pull the second sledge up.




CHAPTER XVIII

WE LAND ON WRANGELL ISLAND


March 12 we got away again at dawn. McKinlay, Mamen, Kataktovick,
Kerdrillo and his family and I went ahead of the others, with lightly
loaded sledges, and, on account of improved ice conditions, made
such good progress that at one _P. M._ we landed on Icy Spit, on the
northeast side of Wrangell Island. It is perhaps easier to imagine
than to describe our feelings of relief at being once again on _terra
firma_, after two months of drifting and travelling on the ice. We had
had a hard road to travel much of the way from Shipwreck Camp, but
fortunately, since the big storm in the days following the departure
of the advance party, we had had continuously fine weather, with good
daylight and exhilarating temperatures in the minus forties and fifties.

As soon as we landed we began building an igloo. There was plenty of
driftwood scattered all about and Keruk gathered up a lot of it and
built a fire, so that by the time the first of our three igloos was
built she had some tea for us and the rest of the party who, coming
along easily with light loads over our trail, arrived an hour and
a half after we did. We were overjoyed to find the driftwood for,
although we were pretty sure of finding it, yet we were a little
dubious and it was a great relief to my mind to know that fuel was
assured.

We could see a good deal of the island from the spit, which made out
from land some distance into the ocean. Waring Point lay far to the
east of us and Evans Point to the west. The geographical names on
Wrangell Island are derived from the names of the officers of the U. S.
S. _Rodgers_ who explored the island in 1881. On a clear day like this
it was not unusual to be able to see for seventy miles. The northeast
side of the island, on which we now were, sent several low sandy spits
out from the land, thus forming lagoons which of course were covered
with ice. Near the coast were low mountains and valleys, with higher
peaks in the interior beyond. Here and there on the beach were dead
trees that had drifted ashore, with the roots sticking up into the air;
we also found planks and other lumber. Everything was snowclad and
white, only a degree less cheerless than the frozen ocean itself.

[Illustration: MAP OF WRANGELL ISLAND

“March 12 we got away again at dawn ... and made such good progress
that at one p. m. we landed on Icy Spit, on the northeast side of
Wrangell Island. It is perhaps easier to imagine than to describe our
feelings of relief at being once again on _terra firma_, after two
months of drifting and travelling on the ice.”

_See page 161_]

The next day Munro, Chafe, Breddy and Williams went back with all the
dogs and sledges to the last camp on the ice, fifteen miles from our
landing-place, and brought in all the supplies we had left there.
While they were gone I sent Kerdrillo nine miles across the lagoon to
Berry Spit, to see if he could find any traces of the mate’s party or
the Mackay party. He took his rifle with him to look for game. When
he came back at nightfall, he reported that he had seen no traces of
either party and only one bear track and one fox track. This was an
indication that there was small chance of getting a bear on or near
the island, because there were no seal holes within twenty-five miles
from land; we had seen some near the big rafter, about forty miles
out. Later in the season, as the ice broke up nearer the land, the
seal would work in shore and of course the bears would follow. I asked
Kerdrillo what he thought the chances were of there being any caribou
or reindeer on the island. It is not an uncommon thing to find caribou
on islands in Hudson Strait, which have drifted on the ice from the
mainland, and there were, I knew, both these animals in plenty on the
Siberian coast. I wondered, too, whether there might not be Arctic hare
on the island. Kerdrillo said he thought there was so much snow that
caribou and reindeer would be unlikely to stay where it would be so
difficult for them to get food and he did not believe any were to be
found.

The next day, to verify his opinion, I sent him out again, giving him
tea and pemmican, so that he could have a full day’s march and make a
reconnaissance into the interior. About dark he returned and reported
that he had seen no traces of caribou, reindeer or hare and very few
signs of foxes. Later on, however, he thought ptarmigan would visit the
island. He had seen one bear track, which he thought was about three
days old, probably of the bear whose tracks he had seen on the previous
day.

The story is told of a student who, when asked to name five Arctic
animals, replied, “Three polar bears and two seal.” If these varieties
were to be all we should find on Wrangell Island, we should still be
able to sustain life, if only we could get enough of them. I should
have liked, however, to know that caribou and reindeer, too, could be
had for the shooting.

We now made a snow shelter and started in on the fourteenth to dry
out our boots and stockings; we had plenty of firewood. Keruk looked
after this work. Maurer’s and Malloch’s feet still troubled them and
Mamen’s knee was a constant cause of suffering, so that I was glad
that they could now have an opportunity to rest. From the moment of
our departure from Shipwreck Camp we had been constantly on the move
during every minute of the daylight. The weather, though cold, had
been exceptionally fine and clear; in fact we had not lost an hour on
account of bad weather and had been inconvenienced for only one night
by open water. As a consequence all hands were in need of a little
rest. The dogs, too, were in a reduced condition, for though they had
had plenty to eat they had worked very hard and I wanted them to get
what rest they could.

For the plan I had been evolving to make my way across Long Strait from
Wrangell Island to the coast of Siberia and seeking an opportunity of
getting help for the party here on the island was now about to be put
to the test. We were on land but were a long way from civilization;
we need not drown but we might starve or freeze to death if we could
not get help within a reasonable time. With the decline of the whaling
industry there was no chance that any ship would come so far out from
the mainland so that the only way to expect help to reach the party
was to go after it. I would take only Kataktovick with me. He was
sufficiently experienced in ice travel and inured to the hardships
of life in the Arctic to know how to take care of himself in the
constantly recurring emergencies that menace the traveller on the
ever-shifting surface of the sea-ice. On my trips with Peary I had
had plenty of leads of open water to negotiate at this time of year
but that was twelve or fifteen degrees north of where we now were.
The later the season grew the greater became the danger of the ice
breaking up and making our escape from Wrangell Island possible only
through the almost miraculous appearance of a chance ship, which was
unlikely so far away from the coast where the trading was carried
on. From now on the leads would be opening with greater and greater
frequency. It behooved me to travel light and fast and get across
before the southerly winds should come and set the ice moving. To
attempt to get such a large number as the entire party over to Siberia
at the speed that was absolutely necessary for crossing before the ice
broke up was obviously out of the question. The journey from Shipwreck
Camp to Wrangell Island had already been a nerve-racking experience for
us all and the trip to Siberia would in many respects be harder and
more dangerous than the road we had already traversed.

The great essential was time. I must make all speed to the mainland
and then along the coast to East Cape, to get transportation across to
Alaska, where I could send word to the Canadian Government. We had now
been out of touch with civilization for months. We had brought food
enough with us to the island to last the men eighty days, full rations;
this would take them into June and the caches along the trail from
Shipwreck Camp could be drawn on while the ice was suitable for travel.
By June the birds would be back again, and always the polar bear and
the seal were reliable sources of supply.

One curious thing about the Siberian journey which Kataktovick and I
now had before us was that apart from the meagre information in the
“American Coast Pilot,” which was much of it based on reports many
years old, I knew about as much about Siberia as I knew about Mars. I
felt quite certain, however, that there were natives dwelling along the
coast on whom we could if necessary depend for food for our dogs and
ourselves.

The weather continued fine and clear nearly all day on the fourteenth,
as it had been for so many days past, but towards night clouds began to
come up from the south and I felt that some change in the weather was
likely to take place. The wind began to blow and by the next morning
had become a gale. We devoted the time to drying out our clothes,
mending them and making what alterations might be necessary.

We had three igloos, the Munro-Hadley parties in one, Kerdrillo and
his party in another and McKinlay, Mamen, Kataktovick and myself in
the third. We were all busy, for we were getting a party ready to go
back over the trail to Shipwreck Camp to pick up supplies. Drying out
clothing, too, takes time and so does the constant mending of clothes
and harness which went forward vigorously. The canvas, in which we had
sewed up our pemmican tins before starting on the march, now proved
its usefulness by furnishing us with the material necessary for making
repairs in dog harness. Mamen dislocated his knee again, poor fellow,
and I had a job getting it back in place; it was extremely painful for
him.

On March 16 a howling northwest gale sprang up in the early morning,
continuing all day long, with blinding snowdrift. On account of the
storm, the party for Shipwreck Camp was unable to leave. The next
morning, however, the wind had died down to a gentle breeze and at
eight A. M. the men got away. We parted for journeys in opposite
directions, for I planned to leave on the following day for Siberia
and would have gone on the seventeenth only that I wanted to see the
others safely off. Munro, Breddy and Willams, with sixteen dogs and one
sledge, were the ones chosen for the work. They were to go out over the
trail to Shipwreck Camp and sledge supplies in two trips across the big
pressure ridge in to the still ice about twenty-five miles from land
and thence to the shore itself, their first load to consist chiefly of
biscuit and their second of pemmican.

After my departure Munro would be in general charge of the men on
Wrangell Island, as, in the absence of the mate, he was by rank second
in command and was, moreover, well fitted for the post. On seeing
him off I went over my instructions to him, which I told him I would
also write out and leave with McKinlay when I got away the next day.
I had had McKinlay make an inventory of the supplies and apportion
them among the party, each to be responsible for his own share. There
would be eighty days’ full rations apiece, even if they got no game or
any further supplies from the caches along the trail and at Shipwreck
Camp. During my absence I directed that the party be divided into three
detachments, living far enough apart from one another to insure as wide
a hunting area as possible for each.

The next morning the weather was not altogether propitious but I felt
that to delay any longer was unwise. I went over the supplies with
McKinlay, wrote out my instructions to Munro and told the men to keep
up their courage, live peacefully and do the best they could. They all
wrote letters home which I took to mail in Alaska.

My letter of instructions to Munro was as follows:

  SHORE CAMP, ICY SPIT, WRANGELL ISLAND,
  March 18th, 1914.

  _My dear Mr. Munro_:

 I am leaving this morning with seven dogs, one sledge and Kataktovick
 to get the news of our disaster before the authorities at Ottawa.

 During my absence you will be in charge.

 I have already allocated supplies to the different parties. McKinley
 has four men, Hadley is with the Eskimo Kerdrillo which makes four
 people, Mr. Williamson three men and yourself three men.

 McKinlay kindly made out a list for me and I will ask him to give a
 copy to you when you get back from your trip to Shipwreck Camp.

 You will make a trip to Herald Island to search for traces of mate’s
 party. On my way I will cover the coast as far as Rodgers Harbor.

 The great thing of course is the procuring of game. In this Kerdrillo
 will be of great assistance. Let him have his dogs and the two others
 so he can cover a good deal of ground; and our own parties, scatter
 them around so that they will be able to hunt and while away the time.
 Give each party enough dogs, if you can spare them so that they can
 better cover the ground.

 As we talked about distributing supplies that you bring back; give
 each one their proportional share. As it stands now there are 80 days’
 pemmican and oil for each person.

 Please do all you can to promote good feeling in camp. You will
 assemble at Rodgers Harbor about the middle of July where I hope to
 meet you with a ship.

  Sincerely yours,
  R. A. BARTLETT,
  Captain, C. G. S.




CHAPTER XIX

KATAKTOVICK AND I START FOR SIBERIA


With our sledge loaded with supplies, which included forty-eight days’
food for ourselves and thirty for the dogs, we shook hands all round
and Kataktovick and I were off on our journey to the Siberian coast.
McKinlay accompanied us for a short distance along the way. It was a
hundred and nine miles in an air line from the southernmost point of
Wrangell Island across to Siberia, but first we must go around the
shore of the island, and the journey across the ice, like all ice
travel, would not be, to say the least, exactly in a straight line. To
have gone along the shore to the northwest and on around the western
end of the island would have cut off some distance but Kerdrillo had
already covered part of the coast that way and by going east and south
I could look for traces of the missing parties in that direction.

Shortly after McKinlay left us, about half a mile from the camp, we
were assailed by increasing blasts of the northwest wind, which swirled
the drifting snow about us and prevented our seeing more than a hundred
yards. We followed the crest of Icy Spit to the main shore and then
continued along the line of the coast. At times we could not see more
than a dozen yards ahead of us and the wind kept on increasing in
violence. The travelling, however, so far as the going under foot was
concerned, was very good, because the snow was hard and windswept. We
followed the lagoons down to Bruch Spit and then kept close alongshore,
inside of the heavy grounded floes. On our way we passed quantities of
stranded drift-wood. At 6.30 P. M. we stopped near Skeleton Island and
built our igloo for the night.

When we started to use our tea boiler, after we had finished our igloo
and crawled inside, we found that in some unaccountable manner a small
hole had opened in the bottom, though I had tried out this boiler the
last thing before I left the camp. So I made use of a device which I
had learned when I was a little boy in Newfoundland. One Saturday, I
remember, we went berry-picking and took along a great iron boiler to
cook our dinner in. When we came to use the boiler we found there was
a crack in it so that it leaked. We had with us some hard Newfoundland
biscuit and my Grandmother Bartlett soaked a couple of pounds of these
biscuit, plastered them inside the boiler over the crack and made it
all tight. Another time I was going up to Labrador in our steam launch.
It was early in the season and we had to go through a good deal of
loose ice; by and by the bow struck a piece of ice and sprang a-leak. I
had about sixty-five pounds of these biscuit on board; we built a dam
up in the bow and put the biscuit in it; when they got well saturated
with the incoming water they made a kind of cement wall that stopped
the leak and saved the day. So now when I found that our tea-boiler was
leaking, I remembered these boyhood experiences, and chewing up a small
piece of the ship’s biscuit which we had with us, I plastered it over
the bottom of the boiler and we were able to use it without further
difficulty.

At the first crack of dawn the next morning, we broke camp, had our
breakfast and started on our way again. The wind was still blowing a
gale from the northwest and the snow drifted around us, as it had the
day before. We followed along the shore, keeping a sharp lookout for
traces of the lost parties. Little or no driftwood was to be seen along
here; in fact, high cliffs came down to the water’s edge and left no
beach for driftwood to lodge. At 11 A. M. we passed Hooper Cairn, which
was built by a party from the U. S. Revenue-cutter _Corwin_ in August,
1881. The cairn, as I could see, was still intact, though I did not go
up on the edge of the cliff to examine it. The only animal life that
we saw all day was a raven and a lemming; we saw no bear tracks, old
or new. As we went along under the high cliffs the wind at times would
come sweeping down a gorge in terrific squalls that almost lifted us
off our feet and whirled the snow down from the mountain-sides in huge
drifts. This cloud of snow, constantly enveloping the island, was the
thing that had prevented us from seeing it on our way in from Shipwreck
Camp, until we were comparatively close to it. With the snow came
myriad particles of sand and pieces of soft shale from the face of the
cliff that cut like a knife. The dogs were pulling fairly well and we
had no difficulty in getting along. At half past five we built our
igloo and turned in.

When we started again at dawn on the twentieth the northwest gale and
the blinding snowdrift were still with us. We had camped only a few
miles from Rodgers Harbor and after crossing the spit which forms the
south side of the harbor we went on over the ice in the harbor and
followed the shore around to find out definitely whether any one had
made a landing there. There were no traces of man to be seen.

It had been my intention to go as directly as possible from Rodgers
Harbor across Long Strait to Cape North on the Siberian coast, but when
we got out on the ice I found that on account of the fact that the
water here was deep near the shore great pieces of ice had been pressed
in, with high rafters, between which were masses of soft, deep snow.
We spent some time trying to find a way through and to make a road
for the sledge to travel over but finally decided that too many hours
would thus be consumed and kept on to the westward, still following the
shore-line. That night, with the darkness upon us, we built our igloo
about a mile to the westward of Hunt Point. We had been on the march
since early morning, but had accomplished little, excepting to find out
that we should be unable to make a trail out over the ice at this point.

We broke camp the next day at early dawn. The wind was now coming from
the east and the drifting snow whirled about us in clouds. Along here
it was a toss-up whether it would be better to go along the sea-ice
or travel on the land; the ice was piled in on the shore and so badly
raftered that we had to use the pickaxe constantly, besides being
drifted deep with soft snow, in which the dogs and sledge made heavy
going and we ourselves on our snowshoes had much ado to pick our way
along, and yet when we tried the land we found that the wind had blown
the rocks bare of snow, which made hard going for the sledge. The dogs
were not working so well, and when we made our igloo at dark we had
finished a day’s hard work that had had many discouraging features
about it. We had been compelled to go as carefully as possible to
conserve our energy and yet, work as we might, we did not seem to be
getting any nearer a point of departure for Siberia, and of course the
farther west we now went along the southern shore of Wrangell Island
the longer would be our eastward journey when once we reached the
mainland.

Consequently, after we took up our journey the next morning we made
another effort to find a way out through the rafters and the deep
snow. About noon we had to abandon the attempt and turn back to the
land; on the way back we broke one of the runners of the sledge and
had to stop for about two hours to repair it. When we finally reached
the land again we found better going, after we had followed the
shore-line westward for a little while, and as we approached the mouth
of Selfridge Bay we found it improving more and more. We got out on
the ice along shore and found the way easier than it had been before,
so that we were able to get to Blossom Point before we camped. The sky
was overcast all day and the light was very bad. While Kataktovick was
building the igloo at night I went on ahead for some distance and found
that the going was getting still better.

The next morning we started out over the ice. Shortly after we left our
camp we broke our sledge again but Kataktovick soon had it repaired.
While he was working on it, I went ahead with the pickaxe. We got under
way again and worked through the raftered ice all day long, making the
road much of the way. Ahead of us, beyond the edge of the raftered ice,
we could see that the air was filled with condensation, indicating the
presence of open water and showing that the ice outside the raftered
ice must be moving under the impetus of the high, westerly wind.
Just before dark we almost reached the edge of the still ice, about
five miles from land. Here we found a very high rafter which, though
not very wide, would nevertheless retard us for two hours while we
completed the road. Once we were out on the running ice, as we should
be by the next day, we should have much easier going, though we should
undoubtedly have a great deal of open water to contend with. We made
our igloo on the raftered ice. I was wearing snow-goggles and though I
slept in them, so that I could get my eyes well accustomed to them, my
left eye was now paining me a good deal. From the time we left Blossom
Point I never again in our journey got a sight of Wrangell Island, on
account of the overcast sky and the drifting snow.

On March 24 we started at dawn as usual and were not long in working
our way through the rough going in the rafter out upon the running
ice. The westerly gale kept the ice in constant motion and Kataktovick
did not like this, but we had the satisfaction of knowing that the open
water meant seal and seal in turn meant bear, either of which would be
valuable additions to our food supply. In fact, just before I slid down
from the outer rafter on to the running ice, I saw two seal in a lead.




CHAPTER XX

ACROSS THE MOVING ICE


From now on, our journey became a never-ending series of struggles
to get around or across lanes of open water—leads, as they are
called,—the most exasperating and treacherous of all Arctic
travelling. We would come to a lead and, leaving the sledge and dogs
by it, Kataktovick would go in one direction and I in the other;
when either of us found a place where we could cross he would fire a
revolver or, if the whirling snow and the condensation were not too
thick would climb up on some rafter where he could be seen by the other
and make a signal to come on. Sometimes there would be a point where
the ice on the opposite sides of the lead almost met and by throwing
the dogs over, bridging the sledge across and jumping ourselves, we
could manage to reach the opposite edge of the ice; at other times the
lead would be too wide for this method and we would have to look for
a floating ice-cake or a projecting piece that we could break off to
use as a ferry-boat. Often we would get across one difficult lead—and
they all had their peculiar difficulties—and then in almost no time
would find ourselves confronted by another. We consumed a great deal
of time crossing the leads and even more in finding a place to cross,
for sometimes, no matter how far we looked in either direction—and it
was not safe for us to get too widely separated—we would find that
in the middle of a lead there was a narrow platform of thin ice, not
strong enough to bear the sledge. It called for the exercise of all the
training I had gained in my twenty years of Newfoundland sealing and
Arctic exploration with Peary to negotiate these constantly recurring
leads with any degree of safety.

We did not turn in until ten o’clock that night, for tired as we were
from our first day’s wrestle with the leads, we had to sit up and mend
our clothes, which had been torn by the jagged rafters.

[Illustration:

  McKinlay      Williamson      Templeman      Chafe      Williams

FIVE OF THE MEN OF THE _KARLUK_ ON WRANGELL ISLAND]

The next morning we were up and away at dawn, in a howling gale from
the west and blinding snowdrift. Open water and young ice across our
path sent us off at right angles to our true course. Several times
during the day the sledge broke through the young ice and before we
could whip up the dogs to rush across we got some of our sleeping
gear wet. The dogs were badly frightened and huddled together in
their terror and of course immensely increasing the danger of
breaking through the ice. We saw a number of bear-tracks during the
day. Somewhere along the trail we lost the little hatchet which
we had for opening pemmican tins. When we missed it, we left the
dogs, thinking that it might have been dropped only a short distance
away, and walked back to look for it, but we found the ice changing
materially and were afraid to go far from our sledge, so we had to
abandon the search, and thereafter had to use a knife in its place.
At half past five, when we stopped and built our igloo, a job that
always took about three quarters of an hour at the end of our day’s
march, we had advanced during the day not over four miles. At this
rate the journey from shore to shore would be a long one. The wind
was moderating somewhat, however, when we turned in, and we hoped for
better weather next day.

Sure enough when we broke camp the following morning we found the wind
a light easterly and the weather fine. It looked as if good going must
now be in store for us; we had had almost continuously stormy weather
from the moment of our departure from Icy Spit. Another encouraging
thing was that shortly after we started on our way, we shot a seal in
a wide lead of water. The Eskimo used a native device for retrieving
the seal. This device consists of a wooden ball, as large as a man’s
fist, made something like a stocking darner, with hooks projecting from
it on all sides; there is a handle eight or ten inches long, with a
white cotton fishing line attached to it about fifty fathoms long. The
Eskimo would whirl this ball around and around by the handle, sometimes
first putting lumps of ice on the slack line near the handle to add
to the weight and thus increase the momentum, and would then let it
fly out beyond where the body of the seal was floating. By carefully
drawing in the line he would hook the seal and pull it along to the
edge of the ice. On this occasion Kataktovick had to lie down and worm
his way out on thin ice to get near enough to the water’s edge to make
his cast, which he made when he found a piece of heavier ice on which
he could stand. I had him fastened to me by a rope, so that when he
finally hooked the seal, he hauled it in hand over hand to the place
where he was standing and then, while he kept his feet firmly together
and slid, I hauled him back on to the solid ice where I was, while he
in turn was towing the seal.

Our hope of better weather proved to be short-lived, for as the day
wore on the wind increased to a living gale from the east. The ice was
constantly in motion and we had many wide leads to negotiate. With the
open water the air was filled with condensation and the light was very
bad. When it came time to build our igloo we had made only about five
miles to the good.

Shortly after midnight the wind veered sharply around until it blew
from the west, without diminishing. We had a small tent with us and
to save time we were in the habit of using this as the roof for our
igloo, weighting it down with snow-blocks and a rifle, pemmican tins
and snowshoes, and covering the whole with snow to make it tight. When
the wind changed it whipped off this canvas roof and the first thing
we knew we were covered with snow. We turned out in the darkness and
looked for our things which were almost completely buried.

It was not a restful night and when daylight came we were glad to be
on the march again. Shortly after we started one of the dogs broke his
trace and got away. Fortunately we caught him before he had gone far.
Some of the dogs were docile and when we unharnessed them would not
stray away but would let us harness them up again when the time came;
others would try to evade us and we had to coax them in with pemmican
before we could catch them.

Being so often adrift on running ice, as we were, is really a wild
experience that is hard on dogs and ours were so tired that with two
exceptions they did not work well. When we came to open water it
took a great deal of urging to get them to jump across; often we had
to unharness them and throw them across, one after another. I had a
bamboo pole, split at one end; I would shake this over the dogs when
we were on the march and the rattling of the loose ends would serve as
a stimulus for them to buckle down to work.

On one occasion the whole team broke away from sledge and started back
over the trail. I was very much afraid that they might run all the
way back to Wrangell Island, leaving us with the sledge half way to
Siberia, so I took a pemmican tin and went through all the motions of
opening it to feed them and then started to walk back towards them. I
dared not run after them, for the more I ran the faster they would go.
After I had walked back half a mile I got near enough to attract their
attention. They pricked up their ears, looked around, saw the tins of
pemmican and finally came back slowly towards me. When they got near
enough I seized the rope. They evidently were afraid they were in for a
licking, for they stayed on their good behavior for several hours.

One great trouble that we had with them was their habit of chewing
their harness, though it was made of hemp canvas instead of sealskin
to prevent that very thing. In the night they would free themselves
in this way and we would have difficulty in catching them, for
although they had collars we had no chains left. Food, clothing and
sledge-lashings had to be kept away from the dogs or they would
chew any of them. One of the dogs was called Kaiser. He got away one
morning and I could not catch him, even though I tried to tempt him
with pemmican. We harnessed up the others and started on our way. All
day he came along behind us, sometimes in sight, sometimes not. When
we stopped to camp and I fed the other dogs, at dark, he finally came
sulkily in and hung around; I paid no attention to him. I saved out
his ration of pemmican, however, and when he finally could hold out no
longer, he came up to be fed and as I gave him the pemmican I caught
him. He never got away again; sometimes we had to tie his mouth so that
he could not chew his harness.

At ten o’clock on the morning after our miserable midnight hunt in the
snow, we were stopped by an open lead of water about three hundred
yards wide. The lead ran east and west across our way and we had to
follow along the northern edge for some distance before we found a
solid piece of ice for our ferry-boat. It was frozen to the edge of
the main floe by thin ice, but we chopped away with our tent poles
and jumped on it until we split it off. Then we put the dogs and the
sledge aboard and with our snowshoes for paddles made our way across
the lead. The ice cake was about ten feet square and one end of the
sledge projected out over the water, but with the dogs huddled in the
middle and ourselves paddling on either side we managed to get along
and landed safely on the other shore.

About five we stopped to camp for the night. I was engaged in brushing
the snow off the sleeping-robes and Kataktovick was cutting out
snow-blocks for the igloo when suddenly he shouted. I looked up and
saw right beside us the largest polar bear I have ever seen. I seized
the rifle and fired. The first shot missed but the second hit him in
the fore-shoulder and the third in the hind-quarter and down he went.
As he fell he stretched out his four paws and I had a chance to get a
good idea of his length; I should judge that he was twelve or thirteen
feet from tip to tip. His hair was snow white and very long but not
very thick; evidently he was old. I cut off a hind-quarter—all we
could carry—to take along with us the next day; we ate some of the
meat—raw, because we had no time to cook it—and made a broth out of
another piece by boiling it in water, made by melting the snow, just
as we made our tea. We gave the dogs all they could eat. They had not
noticed the bear; they were too tired. Evidently he had come upon the
place where we had cut up the seal we had killed the day before and had
followed the scent all day.

Not long after I shot the bear I saw a white Arctic fox near by. At
first I thought he was one of the dogs. I fired at him, but it was too
dark to see to hit him and he got away. He, too, had evidently been
attracted by the pieces of raw seal meat, which we had scattered around
when we had eaten it earlier in the day, and had followed us. The dogs
took no more notice of the fox than they had of the bear.

The next day the strong east wind continued. The sky was overcast and
as there was much snow-drift the light was bad; we were shaping our
course altogether by the compass. The temperature, I should guess,
was about fifteen degrees below zero. We broke camp at seven o’clock
and had not gone more than fifty yards when we found that during the
night an open lead had made in the ice. We followed our usual method
of procedure in such a case, Kataktovick going in one direction and
I in the other, to find a better place to cross. We had no luck and
returned to meet again at the sledge. We now made up our minds to try
to cross here. There was a good deal of young ice in the lead, that
had been smashed up against the edges of the heavier ice, and the snow
that had been blown off the ice into the water had filled up the lead
to some extent and ice and snow had all frozen together in a rough and
irregular mass. I took two tent-poles, therefore, and got out on this
young ice but I soon realized that it was not strong enough to hold
me, so I hastily and carefully made my way back. Kataktovick, however,
was lighter than I; he laid the poles on the ice and, with a rope
fastened to him so that I could pull him back if he broke through, he
crawled over on the young ice and reached the other side in safety.
Then I unloaded the sledge and fastened another rope to it at the
stern; Kataktovick drew it across with just a few articles on it and I
pulled it back empty. We repeated this until we got everything on the
farther side of the lead. The dogs got across by themselves, all but
Kaiser; I could take no chances with him, on account of his propensity
for running away, so he had to be tied and hauled across. I got over
by lying face downward on the empty sledge and having Kataktovick,
with the rope over his shoulder, run as fast as he could and pull me
across. The ice, which was only a single night’s freezing, buckled
and the runners broke through in places but Kataktovick got going so
fast that they did not break through their full length and I got over
in safety. Kataktovick’s safe passage was a relief to me. As far as
physical endurance went I think he was as well able to survive a fall
in the water as I would have been but his experience had been less than
mine and if he had fallen through he would have been so completely
terrified that I believe he would have died of fright.

The method by which he worked his way across with the poles was one
which is followed among the Newfoundland sealers; many a time I had
done the same thing when I was a youngster. You take bigger chances in
sealing than we averaged to take in the Arctic. You leave the ship in
the morning and go out on the ice to kill seals. You take no tea, no
tent or shelter of any kind; perhaps all you have is a little food in
your bag. The weather is fine and offers no indications of change. You
get off eight or ten miles from the ship, which is perhaps the only one
in that vicinity, a couple of hundred miles from land, when suddenly
the ice cracks and open leads form between you and the ship. Your
only chance of safety is that the men on the ship, who are constantly
sweeping the horizon with powerful glasses, have foreseen what is
going to happen and know where you are. If the ice is open near the
ship they will steam over and pick you up. If not they will blow the
whistle and let you know where the ship is, for the chances are that
there is a storm breaking upon you with high winds and snow, so that
you can see the ship only a short time. You have no dogs, no canvas, no
snowshoes, no hot coffee, no stove. If the ship cannot reach you, or
you cannot make your way across the leads and reach her, you freeze to
death. I remember getting into a situation like this when I was a boy;
fortunately I was rescued before things got too bad.

When we got our sledge, dogs, supplies and ourselves across the lead we
had to load up again. The wind was still blowing hard and whirling the
snow around, so that we lost a good deal of time hunting for things in
the drifts and loading the sledge again. It was a slow job. Everything
was white; boxes, bags, sleeping-robes, all the objects of our search,
in fact, were blended into the one dead tone, so that the effect on
the eye was as if one were walking in the dark instead of what passed
technically for daylight. The drifts all looked level but the first
thing we would know we would stumble into a gulch of raftered ice,
heaped full of soft snow, or a crack in the ice, covered by a similar
deceptive mass. Altogether we lost three hours and not until ten
o’clock did we get under way again.

When we finally started we soon found the weather better. This was
fortunate, for in crossing the lead and afterwards in picking up our
things, we had got our clothes and our sleeping-robes more or less
water-soaked and we were glad of a more moderate gale and a higher
temperature, which as the afternoon wore on became almost springlike.
This would mean open water, to be sure, but for the rest of the day
we went along well over old floes of heavy ice where the going was
good and the open leads few. About noon it came off clear and calm,
and during the afternoon we made good progress. In fact, when, just at
dark, we stopped and built our igloo, we had done the best day’s work
since we had left the island.

For the first time, too, we built our igloo on a solid floe where we
could sleep without the constant menace of a split in the ice beneath
us during the night. We found a floe of fresh-water ice near by; up to
this time we had found few of these, none at our stopping-places, and
had had to use snow to make our tea. The dogs had worked well all day;
it was a relief to go on for hour after hour without having to stop for
open water.

The next morning, when we were still in our igloo, finishing our tea,
we heard the dogs outside, sniffing and whining excitedly; something
was up. We always kept our rifle in the igloo when we made camp, with
the magazine full. Now, jabbing a hole in the side of the igloo, we
looked out; the dogs were moving about restlessly. Kataktovick seized
the rifle and jumped outside, with me close at his heels. A bear was
just making off; he had evidently come close and had been frightened by
the dogs. Kataktovick ran after him and fired twice, the first shot
hitting the bear in the hind-quarter, the second in the fore-shoulder,
bringing him down. Before I had our things out of the igloo and loaded
on the sledge, he came back, bringing in a hind-quarter of bear-meat
with him. We fed some to the dogs, though not too much, for if we let
them overeat they would not work well. Some of it we took with us; we
could not carry much, however.

At seven o’clock we finally got away but were soon held up by a lead
of open water which in some places was half a mile wide. Looking from
a high rafter we could see no chance to cross in either direction,
east or west, so we took up our march eastward, the course of the lead
gradually veering to the southeast.

As we went along we saw several seal in the water. One of these we shot
and recovered after some difficulty. The Eskimo captured the seal in
the usual way and towed it to the edge of the ice, which at this point
was about five feet above the surface of the water. As the seal came
alongside, I reached down to haul it up. Braced against a hummock,
Kataktovick held my feet to keep me from sliding down into the water
and I caught hold of the seal by the flipper and held it. The seal was
not quite dead and made some resistance. On account of my position I
could get no purchase on the ice to pull up with my arms and the seal
weighed about a hundred pounds. I managed to lift it out of the water
far enough to get its hind flipper in my teeth, and then Kataktovick
hauled us back. When I got up a little way he passed me a rope and I
jabbed a hole in the flipper and passed the rope through. I was then
able to let go with my teeth, sprang up with the rope in my hand and
dragged the seal up on to the level ice. We skinned it and cut it up
and put as much of the meat on the sledge as we could carry, giving the
dogs a very little. We could have got more seal here but one was all
we could take. Our food consisted very largely of frozen bear meat and
seal meat now, eaten raw because we had no time to cook it. This saved
our pemmican.

About noon we ferried over the lead and found the going so good on the
other side that when, travelling as long as possible to make the most
of it, we built our igloo after dark, we had made at least nine miles
south of the point where we started our day’s march, though the long
tramp along the lead had made our total distance travelled considerably
more than that.




CHAPTER XXI

IN SIGHT OF LAND


March 30—the thirteenth day of our journey from Icy Spit—was the
first fine day we had had. We broke camp at dawn. Almost at once we
encountered open water and from that time until dark crossed lead after
lead. One of them was half a mile wide. It was filled with heavy pieces
of ice, frozen into precarious young ice, the whole mass only solid
enough to enable us to get a few things at a time over on the sledge.
We had to unharness our dogs and haul the lightly loaded sledge across,
picking our way from one heavy piece to another as a man zigzags his
way across a creek on stepping-stones. It took a good many trips to get
everything over.

The sunset was clear and all around the horizon there was not a cloud
in the sky. Looking to the southwest I saw what I was inclined to
believe was land. Perhaps the wish might be father to the thought, and
the days of travel over the white surface of the ice, with the constant
effort to find a place to cross the innumerable leads had brought my
eyes to a state of such acute pain that I could not see as well as
usual. I turned my binoculars on the cloudlike mass on the horizon but
still I remained in doubt.

So I called to the Eskimo and, pointing, asked him, “That land?”

He answered that it might be.

Then I gave him the glasses and sent him up on a high rafter to look
more carefully. After a moment he came back and said that it might be
an island like Wrangell Island but that it would be of no use to us. He
seemed depressed by the hard day we had had, crossing so many leads.
Finally he turned to me and said:

“We see no land, we no get to land; my mother, my father, tell me long
time ago Eskimo get out on ice and drive away from Point Barrow never
come back.”

I tried to hearten him by telling him that Eskimo out on the ice did
not have to get back by themselves but that the white men would bring
them back and that I had been a long distance out on the ice with
Eskimo and we had all got back safely. He still seemed pretty much
discouraged, so I took the glasses and went up on the rafter to see for
myself, though his eyes were in a better condition than mine. I made
every effort to see as well as I could and was convinced that I was
looking at the land. When I called Kataktovick up to look again he was
still very dubious.

That night in our igloo when we were making our tea, he asked me to
show him the chart. I did so and pointed out the course we had taken
and where we were bound. He appeared somewhat encouraged, though still
of the opinion that the land was not Siberia but merely an island,
not set down on the chart. When I tried to brace him up, however, by
saying, “If you ’fraid, you no reach land,” he did not respond very
enthusiastically and slept less soundly than usual that night.

The next day dawned fine and clear. We got out of our igloo before
sunrise, when the horizon was bright and objects along the surface of
the ice were sharply defined against the sky-line; sunrise and sunset
are the best times to see anything at a distance. A good night’s sleep
had rested my eyes and when I looked through my binoculars from the top
of the ridge I could see the land distinctly, covered with snow. I was
surprised to be able to see it so clearly. I called to Kataktovick to
come up.

“Me see him, me see him _noona_ (land),” he said; he had been up on the
rafter, he added, before I had got out of the igloo.

“What you think him?” I asked. “You think him all right?”

“Might be, might be, perhaps,” he replied.

Evidently he was still dubious about its being Siberia. He had been
satisfied by the chart the night before; at Shipwreck Camp and again
at Wrangell Island I had explained the charts to him, had shown him
where we were going, what we were going to do with the charts, how far
away Siberia was and how far we should have to travel to meet Eskimo,
expressing the distances by comparing them with the distance from Point
Barrow to the deer camp, for instance, or down to Cape Lisburne, trips
that were familiar to him. Now, however, he still appeared skeptical
of the identity of the land we were looking at. He said it was not
Siberia. When I asked why, he replied that he had been told by his
people that Siberia was low land. I explained to him that the shore
was, it was true, low in many places, running out for miles into the
sea. This low fore-shore was known as the tundra; owing to the distance
we could see only the hinterland behind it, which was high. Kataktovick
listened to my explanation and then shook his head. It might be an
island, he said; Alaskan Eskimo on the Siberian shore, so he had been
told, are always set upon and killed by the Eskimo there. I told him
as best I could that the Siberian Eskimo were just as kindly disposed
towards wayfarers as the Alaskan Eskimo and that he had nothing to
fear. I think he still rather hoped that the land we saw was not
Siberia but a new island, so that he might postpone as long as possible
the horrible fate he was convinced was in store for him.

From the time we started that morning we had leads of water and
treacherous young ice to contend with. In some places we could get
across easily; in others we had to make wide detours. At noon we
stopped on the north side of a narrow lead and Kataktovick made a
little snow igloo to serve as shelter while we rested for awhile. He
understood perfectly how to use the Primus stove and he made some
tea. While he was doing this I reconnoitered to the eastward, walking
probably two miles before I came to a point where we could cross. When
I returned to the sledge the Eskimo had the tea ready and we found it
most refreshing. We could always eat bear meat whenever we were hungry.
It got frozen on the sledge, of course, but with a knife or a hatchet
we would chip off small pieces, or sometimes we would thaw it out by
rolling it up in our shirts and letting our bodily heat melt the frost.

We now went on to the eastward to the point I had selected for crossing
the lead. There was young ice here but it was not very strong, so we
had to adopt our customary expedient of pulling the sledge over and
back lightly loaded. Once across we went on for some time without
trouble with open water but presently found ourselves among heavy
raftered ice, with high pinnacles and in between them masses of snow,
deep and not very hard. We had to use the pickaxe a good deal and the
dogs had hard going. Three of them were getting to be very sick.

Towards the end of the day we could see the land distinctly, about
forty miles away. When we built our igloo at dark we had made at least
ten miles to the good, though our actual march had been longer than
that. The Eskimo appeared very much depressed. I was naturally feeling
cheerful myself because in two or three days we should be on land.
Furthermore I believed most of our troubles with open leads would soon
be over, as we approached nearer the shore ice, though the going would
probably be rough from the pressure of the running-ice on the still
ice, just as we had found it in getting away from Wrangell Island.

During the latter part of our day’s journey I fell and hurt my side.
My eyes troubled me more than ever, because I broke the glass in my
goggles and, though I had another pair, I did not find that they suited
me as well as those to which I had become accustomed. Kataktovick, too,
wore goggles.

On April 1 we made a good day’s march. The going was rather rough, but
we were fortunate in finding the young ice firm enough to bear us so
that we did not lose much time in getting across the leads to the big
floes where it was smoother and more level. About three o’clock in the
afternoon we came to a belt of raftered ice and deep, soft snow, where
we had to use the pickaxe. After two hours’ work we got through and had
good going the remainder of the day.

We got away from our igloo at six o’clock the next morning and found
that the going continued good for a while. After a time we came to
another patch of rough, heavy ice, with open leads, which we had to
cross. Then we came to a long strip of firm, young ice and had good
travelling, later reaching older floes and raftered ice; we managed to
make our way round the ends of the rafters and did not have to use the
pickaxe at all. This was a great relief for we wasted no time in making
a road. The dogs, however, were pretty nearly worn out and could only
be made to work by constant urging; in fact, during the day two of them
gave out completely.

We made camp at half past seven. The land was not over fifteen or
eighteen miles away, so we knew that we had done a good day’s work.

At about one o’clock the next morning, while we were asleep, the ice
split near the igloo and opened about two feet. We had to get out of
the igloo at once because, although the crack did not come inside, it
was so near that the walls split on the south end. Shortly after we
got out the ice began to move about and we had to work fast to save
the dogs. Some of them had been tethered and others loose; now we let
them all loose to give each a better opportunity if the ice broke up
any more, taking our chances on getting them together again in the
morning. We removed everything from the igloo and loaded up the sledge,
lashing everything tight. The night was fine and clear, with brilliant
star-light and no wind whatever, all of which was in our favor, though
it was still so dark that we could not see our way around.

We stayed up the rest of the night and at dawn had some meat and
pemmican and drank some tea. As soon as it was light enough we got
away, hoping that by night we should be on land. The ice was in motion
everywhere, however, and there were open leads on every hand. We had
light enough to see what we had to do but there was a great deal of
condensation and we could not see very far. The ice was grinding and
groaning, and splitting in all directions about us as we travelled and
the noise made the dogs so uneasy that at times they were practically
useless. Finally, about three o’clock in the afternoon, the light was
so bad and the ice was moving so constantly that we could not get
along so we stopped, built our igloo, drank some tea and turned in.

At six o’clock the next morning, the fourth of April, we left the dogs
and the sledge in camp and went ahead with pickaxes to make a trail
through the rough ice. It was a fine, clear day. From a high rafter
I could see an open lead on the other side of the belt of rough ice,
and beyond the lead the ice-foot, itself, as it is called in Arctic
parlance,—the ice which is permanently attached to the land and
extends out into the sea.

At ten o’clock, leaving Kataktovick to continue the road-making with
the pickaxe, I went back to the camp, harnessed up the dogs and drove
them along the trail that we had made. When we reached the open lead
we had to look for a place to cross. Finally we found a point where
the moving ice nearly touched the still ice. The dogs, however, were
so frightened that they were afraid to stir. We tried to make them
jump across the crack but they lay down and would not budge. While we
delayed thus the crack widened; the moving floe was drifting away. I
made up my mind that it was now or never, so I cut the traces, jumped
across the widening gap and pulled the sledge across. Then I threw a
rope to Kataktovick and pulled him across flying. The dogs we managed
to grasp by traces or wherever we could get hold of them and dragged
them across. Before long the lead had opened to a considerable width.
We were now on the land ice, free from open water, and had only
rafters, rough ice and deep snow to contend with. I sent Kataktovick
on towards the land to see how the going was and I started in to make
a road with the pickaxe, while the dogs rested by the sledge. In about
an hour he came back and said that after he had got through the rough
ice he had found the going good. We both worked on the road with our
pickaxes and in the afternoon got about through the rough ice to
smoother going beyond. I went back and brought up the dogs and the
sledge and by the time I reached Kataktovick he was through the rough
ice. It was a fine, clear day, without any wind; the temperature, I
should judge, was about fifty below zero.

The good going did not last long for we soon came to rough ice, with
deep, soft snow. Here we had to wear our snowshoes again. For a good
part of the way across from Wrangell Island we had not been able to use
them because the ice was too rough and jagged and, furthermore, we had
had so much jumping to do, getting across the leads, that we could not
spare the time necessary to put the snowshoes on and off, or run the
risk of breaking them. Our footgear was wet, too, and the ugsug rawhide
straps across the toes sank in so far that there was danger that our
feet would freeze by the stopping of the circulation. Yet, wherever
it is practicable to wear them, snowshoes are indispensable in Arctic
travel and I should as willingly do without food as without snowshoes.
At this point we threw all the supplies off the sledge excepting enough
for one day and, with the sledge light, made the road with pickaxes
towards the land.

[Illustration: CAPTAIN BARTLETT’S CHART OF THE ALASKAN COAST FROM THE
MACKENZIE RIVER TO BERING STRAIT]

The Eskimo now showed by his manner that he was feeling more
optimistic. Finally, as we were working our way through the rough ice,
he said that he smelled wood-smoke, and asked whether I smelled it,
too. I did not but I had no doubt that he did, for an Eskimo’s sense
of smell is remarkably acute. I felt sure that we were not far from
human habitation, though just what this might be I could only guess.
From the leaves of the “American Coast Pilot” that I had with me, I
was able to learn that “the northeast coast of Siberia has been only
slightly examined, and the charts must be taken as sketches and only
approximately accurate. The first examination was by Cook, in 1778; the
next exploration was by Admiral von Wrangell in 1820; in 1878, Baron
Nordenskïold, in the _Vega_, passed along the coast, having completed
the N. E. passage as far as Pitlekaj, where he was frozen in and
wintered. In 1881 the coast was examined in places by Lieut. Hooper
of the U. S. S. _Corwin_, and the description of the salient points
here given is from the report of the _Corwin_.” This was not exactly
what could be called up-to-date information. In the _Karluk’s_ library
had been a copy of Nordenskïold’s “Voyage of the _Vega_,” but it was in
German, a language which I am unable to read. The pictures indicated
that woods extended in places down to the shore and that reindeer
lived in the woods. What I particularly wanted to know, however, was
in what condition the Siberian natives now were, what food they had to
eat, and whether they were afflicted with tuberculosis, to which so
many primitive races have succumbed after contact with the beneficent
influences of civilization, for more than thirty years had elapsed
since Nordenskïold’s journey and in that length of time radical changes
in numbers or habitation might have come to the whole population.

Late in the afternoon we got through the rough ice and for the
remaining mile or so to the shore had good going. At five o’clock in
the afternoon we landed on the Siberian coast. It was the fourth of
April and we had been seventeen days on the march. The distance we
had actually gone in making the journey was not less than two hundred
miles.

The first thing the Eskimo saw when we reached the land was the trail
of a single sledge along the tundra.

“_Ardegar_ (that’s good),” he said; “Eskimo come here.”

I asked him if it was Siberia and he said it was.

“Where we go?” I asked.

Without a moment’s hesitation he pointed to the east.

A snowstorm had already begun, while we were still on the march, and it
was now coming on with rapidly increasing violence, so we set to work
at once and in half an hour had an igloo built, and a shelter for our
dogs, now reduced to four. When we got inside the igloo we made tea,
boiled some of the bear meat we had with us and ate until we could eat
no more. Then we turned in. It seemed pretty good to sleep on land
again.




CHAPTER XXII

WE MEET THE CHUKCHES


At dawn the next morning we left our igloo and went back over the trail
we had made to the place where we had thrown off our supplies the
afternoon before. Owing to the bad light and the drifting snow, we had
a good deal of trouble in picking up our things and the trail itself
was frequently obscured, but we managed to get our stuff together again
and by nine o’clock were back at our igloo ready to begin our march
eastward. We made some tea and at ten o’clock started on our way. On
account of the overcast sky and the thick snow we could see little of
the surrounding country and I had no way of telling just where we were.
Later on, when I had a chance to go over the chart with Baron Kleist
at East Cape, I figured out that we had landed near Cape Jakan, about
sixty miles west of Cape North.

We found the travelling excellent along the tundra. The trail was
plainly marked, for the wind had swept the land nearly bare of snow,
and the tracks of the sledge that had passed that way before were
defined enough to be easily followed. After our days of stumbling over
the rough ice and crossing open leads it seemed as simple as walking
along a country road. Our dogs were in bad shape and only one of the
four was of any real use.

About two o’clock in the afternoon we could make out black objects some
distance ahead of us; as we drew nearer we could see that they were
moving. Kataktovick had been ahead, while I drove the dogs; now he
stopped, came back and said, “Eskimo igloo.”

“_Ardegar_,” I replied, and told him to go on.

He set his face eastward again and I urged the dogs harder than ever.
Ordinarily he was a good walker but now he seemed to be lagging a
little and dropping back, nearer and nearer the dogs. I asked him what
the matter was.

“Eskimo see me, they kill me,” he said. “My father my mother told me
long time ago Eskimo from Point Barrow go to Siberia, never come back,
Siberian Eskimo kill him.”

I told him that he was mistaken and repeated what I had said the day
before about the hospitality of the Siberian Eskimo. Our troubles were
at an end, I said; we should now have a place to dry our clothes and
get them mended, or perhaps get new ones. “Maybe,” I added, “we get
tobacco.”

Kataktovick was still reluctant, even though I told him that perhaps
we could get some dogs, or even persuade some of the Eskimo to travel
along with us.

We could now make out that the objects ahead of us were human beings
and that they were running about, apparently very much excited by our
approach. Kataktovick hung back near the dogs. At length I said, “You
drive the dogs now and I will go ahead.” He did so with evident relief
and so we went on until I was within ten yards of the Eskimo. Then I
put out my hand and walked towards them, saying in English, “How do
you do?” They immediately rushed towards us and grasped us each warmly
by the hand, jabbering away in great excitement. I could understand
nothing of what they were saying, nor could Kataktovick. I tried to
make them understand who we were and where we had come from but they
were as ignorant of my language as I was of theirs.

There could be no doubt, however, that they were glad to see us and
eager to show their hospitality, for the first thing we knew they had
unharnessed our dogs and were feeding them, had taken our sledge into
the outer part of their house and put it, with everything still on
it, up on a kind of scaffold where it would be away from the dogs and
sheltered from the weather. Then an old woman caught me by the arm and
pushed me into the inner inclosure and on to a platform where three
native lamps were going, one at each end and the other in the middle.
The roof was so low that my head touched it, so I sat down. The woman
brushed the snow off my clothes with a snow-beater shaped like a sickle
and thinner than ours, placed a deerskin on the platform for me to sit
on, pulled off my boots and stockings and hung them up to dry. Then she
gave me a pair of deerskin stockings, not so long as ours, because,
as I could see, the trousers that these Siberians wore were longer
than ours. After that she took off my parka or fur jacket and hung it
up to dry, while I pulled off my undershirt. Others were waiting upon
Kataktovick in the same way and here we were, when we had hardly had
time to say, “Thank you,” clad only in our bearskin trousers and seated
comfortably about a large wooden dish, filled with frozen reindeer
meat, eating sociably with twelve or fourteen perfect strangers to
whom, it might be said, we had not been formally introduced. Never have
I been entertained in a finer spirit of true hospitality and never have
I been more thankful for the cordiality of my welcome. It was, as I
was afterwards to learn, merely typical of the true humanity of these
simple, kindly people.

When I had time to look about me, I found that I was seated in a large,
square room, shaped somewhat like a large snow igloo, though the
Siberian Eskimo or Chukches, as these natives are called, know nothing
of snow igloos or how to build them. Their house, as I was presently to
learn, is called an aranga. There is a framework of heavy drift-wood,
with a dome-shaped roof made of young saplings. Over all are stretched
walrus skins, secured by ropes that pass over the roof and are
fastened to heavy stones along the ground on opposite sides. The inner
inclosure, which is the living apartment, is about ten feet by seven;
it is separated by a curtain from the outer inclosure where sledges
and equipment are kept. In the living apartment the Chukches eat and
sleep on a raised platform of turf and hay, covered with tanned walrus
skin. They light and heat their houses and do their cooking with a lamp
which consists of a dish of walrus or seal oil, with a wick of moss in
it. This is superior to wood for such a dwelling-place, for it makes
no smoke; the lamp is lighted by a regulation safety match, though to
be sure it is seldom allowed to go out. The three lamps in this aranga
made the room pretty hot; the temperature, I should guess, was about a
hundred.

Our hosts and hostesses, comprising three families who dwelt in three
arangas at this place, were always drinking tea. They used copper
kettles to melt the ice in and Russian tea, put up in compressed slabs
a foot long, eight inches wide and three-fourths of an inch thick. In
our honor the old woman brought out cups and saucers of the prettiest
china I have ever seen; the cups were very small, holding about three
sips. Each cup was wrapped in a dirty cloth, on which the old woman
wiped it after carefully spitting on it to make it clean. When I saw
her method of dish-washing, I was impolite enough to ask Kataktovick
to go out and get my mug from the sledge; when he returned with it our
hostess looked disappointed, though whether from the large size of the
mug or because I did not apparently appreciate her kindness in using
her best china for us, I cannot say.

When we had finished the wooden dish of reindeer meat, which though
uncooked was good eating, they brought in another filled with walrus
meat, evidently taken from a walrus killed the previous summer, which
had a smell that I cannot describe. Out of politeness I tried to eat
it, but found it was a little too much for me. Kataktovick enjoyed it.
Later on I asked him why he wanted the same food we had aft while he
was on the ship and yet was willing to eat this foul walrus meat; he
said he liked it. Apparently although they live pretty much on white
man’s food the Eskimo enjoy getting back once in a while to walrus meat
and blubber that have seen better days.

After the walrus meat we had more tea. I had about a hundred saccharine
tablets with me, so when the fresh tea was brought in I used them all
up in it.

I could see that the Siberians were puzzled about Kataktovick. They
talked about him and to him; at first, I am quite sure, they did not
think that he was an Eskimo. They evidently took me for a trader,
though they had not seen me go up the coast. The sledge was all bundled
up, so that they could not see what I had, and rather lightly loaded,
so that apparently I had sold my goods and was now working down
the coast on my homeward journey. They were in evident doubt about
Kataktovick, because he and they could not understand each other’s
speech. He would talk to them in the language of the Alaskan Eskimo and
they would put up their hands and touch their faces to show that they
did not understand. Then they would talk to him and he, in turn, would
throw up his hands and say, “Me no savvy.”

After we had finished our second round of tea, they made signs to show
that they wanted to know where we came from. I took out my charts,
showed them where we drifted, pointed out Wrangell Island and told them
of the men there, showed them where the ship sank and where we had
just landed. I first made a ship out of matches. When I saw that this
did not convey any idea to them I drew pictures on the charts; to show
where the _Karluk_ sank and what happened to make her sink, I drew a
picture of a ship, surrounded it with lines intended to represent ice,
clapped my hands and rubbed the whole thing out. This they understood
well enough to know what I was driving at. They told me their names but
I could neither pronounce them nor write them. We started our feast
at two o’clock and continued through the afternoon and until late at
night, having tea every five minutes.

We still had four or five of the little tin boxes of tabloid tea left;
there were pictures of India on the box-covers which attracted the
Chukches wonderfully. I had some Burberry cloth left and I had the
old woman make a bag, into which I emptied the tea; then I gave the
empty tins with their pretty covers to the children. The tea tablets
interested the older folk so I contributed some to the “party.”

[Illustration: CAPTAIN BARTLETT’S CHART OF THE SIBERIAN COAST AND
BERING STRAIT

“After we had finished our second round of tea, they made signs to show
that they wanted to know where we came from. I took out my charts,
showed them where we drifted, pointed out Wrangell Island and told them
of the men there, showed them where the ship sank and where we had just
landed.” _See page 213._]

Spreading out the chart I inquired by signs about the people that we
might find on our journey eastward, I was assured that we should see
them all along the coast and that there were one or two communities of
them like this on the way to Cape North. I could find Cape North on the
chart, on which, of course, it was clearly marked. The Chukches,
however, did not know what I meant when I used the name but finally one
of them said “Irkaipij.” He repeated it again and again and at last I
understood that it was another name for the same place. I laid a lot of
matches on the chart, showing our course, and the same man, by means of
these matches, indicated that at Cape North were several arangas. From
the presence of cooking utensils, tea and tobacco I concluded, and, as
I learned later, correctly, that I should run across Russian traders
here and there on our march.

I wondered whether these Chukches were travellers and ever left the
coast to journey into the interior of the country. By drawing pictures
of trees and reindeer on the chart I found that I could make them
understand what I wanted to know; then by marking on the chart they
showed me that they made journeys of fifteen sleeps’ duration before
they reached the reindeer country. I learned afterwards that there were
two kinds of natives, the coast Eskimo and the deer men, the latter a
hardier type of man than the former. The coast natives get their living
by hunting, their chief game being walrus, seal and bear. Some of them
have large skin-boats for travelling from settlement to settlement,
covering in this way considerable stretches of coast. They do not go
out upon the drift ice. Two years before, so Kataktovick discovered,
two hunters had got adrift on the ice and had not come back; we were
now requested to tell whether we had seen any signs of them.

They establish their arangas when possible near a river, where they
can fish for salmon and trout and get ice to melt for water, instead
of using snow, a large quantity of which is needed for such a purpose.
I found a number of men and women along the coast who were between
fifty and sixty years of age, but they looked and acted older; they
seem to be pretty generally affected with turberculosis, more or less
developed, and do not take the right care of themselves. When they
get too old and feeble to support themselves and have become a burden
to others, they destroy themselves. I do not think they make any
graves,—at least I saw none; apparently their bodies are left for the
birds and animals to eat.

I did not, of course, acquire all my information about the natives from
the first ones I met, though to be sure they were a typical group and
exemplified, the more I studied them, all the customs of the country,
especially that of continual feasting of the stranger within their
gates.

About eleven o’clock that night we all lay down together on the
bed-platform,—men, women and children; the youngsters had all remained
outside the curtain until that time. The air was hot and ill-smelling,
and filled with smoke from the Russian pipes which the Chukches used,
pipes with little bowls and long stems, good for only a few puffs. When
they were not drinking tea they were smoking Russian tobacco. All the
time, with hardly a moment’s cessation, they were coughing violently;
tuberculosis had them in its grip. When they lay down to sleep they
left the lamps burning. There was no ventilation; the coughing
continued and the air was if anything worse and worse as the night
wore on. Some time between two and three in the morning I woke up; I
had been awake at intervals ever since turning in but now I was fully
aroused. The air was indescribably bad. The lamps had gone out and when
I struck a match it would not light. The Chukches were all apparently
broad awake, coughing incessantly. I felt around for the curtain and
when I found it held it open. This was evidently a new experience for
them; they were clearly afraid of draughts. I was a guest, however, and
they politely refrained from outward objections.

My diary for the next day, April 6, begins: “Anniversary of the
discovery of the North Pole. No doubt in New York the Explorers’ Club
is entertaining Peary.”

All day the wind blew hard from the northwest, with blinding
snowdrifts. Had we been ever so inclined to move we could have
done little travelling and our enforced stay gave us a good chance
to dry out our clothes, which had became saturated with salt water
and perspiration, and to mend the numerous tears where the jagged
corners of the raftered ice had got in their work. I borrowed boots
and stockings from the natives for Kataktovick and sent him out with
another Eskimo to repair our sledge, which was much the worse for wear.
We made some new dog-harness and repaired the old. I tried to buy a dog
or two here but the natives had none to sell; in fact they had very few
dogs at any time.

Towards afternoon Kataktovick came in and told me that he thought one
of the natives would go on to Cape North with us, taking with him his
dog and his small sledge. This was welcome news, for by guiding us
along the uncertainties of the trail he could expedite our travelling.

I had two or three cheap watches and other small articles and had saved
half a dozen razors of my own; these things I divided among the natives
along the way. Money, of which I had only a little, was not much good.
To the old woman who had taken off my boots when we first arrived here
I gave a cake of soap and some needles, to her daughter some empty tea
tins and to her twelve-year-old boy a watch and a pocket-knife. The
Siberian women are very industrious; they do all the housework, of
course, sewing and mending the skin clothing, and, if need be, they
drive the dogs.

With the conditions now favorable for progress along shore, I knew
that, with luck, I should be able to reach civilization and arrange to
have aid sent to the men on Wrangell Island. I thought about them all
the time, however, and worried about them; I wondered how the storms
which had so delayed our progress across Long Strait had affected
Munro’s chances of retrieving the supplies cached along the ice from
Shipwreck Camp and getting safely back to the main party, and how
the men would find life on the island as the weeks went by and they
separated according to my instructions for the hunting which would
sooner or later have to be their main dependence.




CHAPTER XXIII

EASTWARD ALONG THE TUNDRA


By the next morning, April 7, we were ready to start on our way. Our
clothes were all dried out and in order, our sledge was repaired, our
dogs were rested and the dogs and ourselves had had a chance to eat
heartily and at our leisure. Before we got away an old woman from
one of the other arangas came over and asked us to go to her aranga.
We found that she had a lot of dried deer fat or suet, which she
considered a great delicacy. She offered us some, with sugar to eat
with it, and then her married daughter gave us some tea. She had about
eight lumps of sugar left from her winter’s stock. She made signs to
ask me if I liked sugar. I said yes and took some with my tea. The way
these Siberian Eskimo use their sugar is to take a sip or two of tea
and then a bite of the sugar; they do not put the sugar in the tea and
stir it up, but eat the sugar and wash it down with tea. The old lady
also offered me a pair of deerskin mittens which were very acceptable.
I gave her some needles suitable for sewing skins and she was very much
pleased with them.

The morning was very bright and fine. We got away at ten o’clock with
our four dogs and our sledge, and a native came along with us. He had
very little on his sledge, which was small and light, and he rode a
good deal. We walked as usual, not wearing our snowshoes where the snow
was no deeper than it was along here. The going was pretty good. The
sun was shining; there was no wind, but it was very cold. For a while
our dogs kept up a good pace but they soon slowed down.

During the afternoon we passed two more arangas where we had some tea.
All through the day I had the greatest difficulty in keeping my hands
from being frozen; I cannot explain why. I had never had any trouble
that way before but now it was only by making the most frantic efforts
and keeping constantly alert that I was able to prevent their freezing.
The temperature, I should guess, was between fifty and sixty below
zero. We travelled along well all day and at sunset built our snow
igloo. I was surprised to find that our companion knew nothing about
cutting out snow blocks and that with the Siberian Eskimo building a
snow igloo was evidently a lost art. On their travels from place to
place along the coast they very seldom venture out unless the weather
is fine, and they can always reach another aranga by the end of the
day, so they have no need, I found, to build their own sleeping-place
as we had been accustomed to do.

Our Eskimo had no dog food; he would get some at Cape North, he said. I
still had some dog pemmican left; at his aranga he had fed our dogs so
that night when I fed our dogs I gave some pemmican to his dog.

It was a great pleasure to sleep that night in our igloo. The air was
not foul and close, as it had been in the aranga on the previous night,
and we did not have the constant annoyance of coughing going on all
around us. Our companion coughed a little when he first turned in but
soon left off and we all fell asleep, not waking up until daylight.

The sky was overcast and the wind north when we broke camp at six
o’clock the next morning. We could not see very far. As we proceeded
along the tundra we found that it became narrower as we approached
Cape North. Our Siberian companion was very kind and added his dog
to the four still remaining to us. His sledge was hardly larger than
a child’s sled in America and we carried it easily on our sledge. By
travelling hard all day we found ourselves approaching the settlement
at Cape North about sunset. We had made a good two days’ march in
spite of the dubious weather and the extreme cold. Low temperatures
were not exactly new to me but for some reason or other I felt the
cold along the Siberian coast more acutely than anywhere else in all
my Arctic work. There were stretches of shore line, when the wind
swept unobstructed across the ice fields from the north, where I was
particularly sensitive; I had no thermometer, but judging from the
condition of the coal oil and comparing the general effect of the air
upon my skin and its particular tendency to freeze my face and hands, I
should say that the temperature was at least sixty below zero.

When we were crossing the smooth ice at the entrance to the small
harbor at Cape North our guide pointed to one of the arangas on the
opposite shore and made signs that we were to go there. It was nearly
dark but we could see that there were eleven arangas altogether and we
made our way towards the one which he pointed out. Presently we met
some natives. Without hesitation they seized my arm and conducted me
over to the aranga towards which we had been heading. Outside of the
aranga awaiting my coming, was a very tall man, muffled up in furs. I
had an idea that he was a white man so I asked, “Do you speak English?”

“Some little,” he replied, and unwrapped the furs somewhat from around
his face; I saw that he was a Russian.

“One man he speak more English,” he added.

In a moment another Russian came along; his ability to speak English
intelligibly proved to be less than the first man’s. By paying careful
attention to what he was saying I was able to tell approximately what
he was trying to say, and thus we managed to surmount the barrier of
language. I gathered that he had been a longshoreman in Seattle and
that he knew that Mr. Taft had been president of the United States. He
asked me, in fact, if I knew him.

While we were standing there Kataktovick came up and asked me what he
should do.

“You take out the dogs,” I said, “and come with me.”

In the excitement at seeing a white stranger come along in this
unexpected way no one thought for the moment of asking us to come into
the aranga; there was no intentional inhospitality—they all simply
forgot to do the honors.

After a few more attempts at conversation between the Russians and
myself, a native came along and said, “You old man?”

His question puzzled me at first; presently it dawned on me that he was
speaking in nautical parlance and wanted to know if I was a captain.
“Yes,” I replied.

“You come below in my cabin, old man,” he said, meaning that I was to
go into his aranga.

I followed him and we entered his aranga together. Cold as it was
outside, the air inside was very warm, too warm for comfort. There
were a good many people there. Talking with my host as best I could I
learned that at one time he had lived at East Cape and had met some
of the whalers there in the days when Arctic whaling was still a big
industry; he had been aboard of them and knew their names.

“Me know _Karluk_,” he said, in reply to a question of mine. “Me on
board _Karluk_ when she whale.”

He was surprised to think that we were on a whaling voyage and I
explained to him by the chart what we were trying to do and where we
had been when the ship went down. He understood a good deal of what I
told him and was able to understand a little of Kataktovick’s language,
but I could see that he was much surprised when he realized that we had
walked all the way from Shipwreck Camp to get to the land. He seemed
to have an idea that this was a great feat. I explained to him that
Kataktovick was with me and built our igloos and killed seal and bear,
and that an Eskimo and a white man could live indefinitely on the ice.

While we were talking and I was having some tea and seal meat the first
of the two Russians that we had met came in and at his invitation I
went with him back to his aranga. Here we had a genuine meal—Russian
bread, salmon, tea and milk. I explained to him what we were doing and
how the ship was lost. At East Cape, he said, he had a brother who
would look after us and make us comfortable; he gave me a letter of
introduction to his brother. Their name was Caraieff. As for himself
he was bound further westward on a trading trip to Cape Jakan. In ten
days he would be back again at Cape North and he urged me to wait until
then; he had two fine teams of dogs that would be of great assistance
to us. I declined his invitation, however, for I was anxious to get on
and had an idea that after I got to East Cape I should go to Anadyr
and send my message to Ottawa from the Russian wireless station there,
mentioned on my chart. If I had known enough about the Siberian coast I
could have gone direct from Cape North to Anadyr southeast across the
Chukchi Peninsula in about the time that it took me to get from Cape
North to East Cape.

I spent a very comfortable night in the aranga occupied by Mr.
Caraieff. It was rather warm but I shed some of my clothing and lay
down on a deer-skin, spread out on the bed-platform. Mr. Caraieff and
I attempted to converse before dropping off to sleep but he spoke very
little English and I no Russian whatever, so I am afraid neither
gathered much information about the other.

I have often wondered at the courteous willingness of the Russians and
Chukches whom we met along our way to take entirely for granted our
presence among them. They showed no impertinent curiosity and did not
subject us to any unpleasant inquisition; they required no custom-house
examination, no passports, no letters of recommendation! We were not
traders, yet we were obviously strangers with strange travelling gear,
and it was hardly likely that we were taking a walk for our health. In
more than one semicivilized country shipwrecked mariners have from the
earliest times been considered fair prey for the natives. We had our
charts, to be sure, but shipwrecked mariners who go ashore driving a
team of dogs are not common, even in the Arctic. Yet all the way along
we were received without question, greeted hospitably, made comfortable
and guided on our way with no consideration of payment; we might have
been city cousins visiting around among country relatives.

Cape North, which was first seen and named by the famous English
voyager, Captain Cook, in the _Resolution_, in 1778, is a point of
considerable importance on the Siberian coast. Of the eleven arangas
several were occupied by deer men, the men who look after herds of
reindeer in the interior and come out to the coast at intervals to
exchange their reindeer meat for seal and walrus meat, and for blubber
for their oil lamps. Baron Kleist, whom I met later on at East Cape,
told me that he had been in reindeer camps where two men owned four
thousand reindeer. He had seen these men out in the open, under the
necessity of looking after their herds constantly day and night for
thirty-six hours, without shelter of any kind, and their faces, he
said, were literally burned black from the frost and wind.

Before we went to sleep that night, Mr. Caraieff made tea, and as
he had sugar and milk for it and some Russian bread to eat we had a
very pleasant supper party. The Chukch who owned the aranga had a
four-year-old grandson who ate his share of decayed walrus meat and
drank his full allowance of tea with four lumps of sugar for each small
cupful.

My eyes were affected a good deal by the irritation of the overheated
atmosphere, with its almost complete lack of ventilation. I found
occasional relief by lifting the edge of the curtain and letting the
cold air play upon my eyes. The temperature out-of-doors was about
fifty below zero and bitterly cold, much more so, Mr. Caraieff said,
than we should find it nearer East Cape.

When I put my head outside of the aranga, about seven o’clock the next
morning, I found that the wind was blowing almost a hurricane from the
west and sweeping the snow into heavy drifts. Mr. Caraieff told me
that he would be unable to travel against it but as it would be at our
backs I decided to start. For breakfast I went around to the aranga
occupied by the other Russian and made a first rate meal of frozen bear
meat, flapjacks and cocoa, topping off with three pipefuls of American
tobacco. About ten o’clock we started on our way. We had not gone far
before the weather cleared and the wind died down, so that we had a
beautiful, clear, cold day and made good progress along the tundra. At
sunset we built our igloo, had our pemmican and some deer meat that
Kataktovick had procured at Cape North and turned in. Long since we had
used up our supply of ship’s biscuit, most of which had got damaged
beyond use by salt water on the way across the ice from Wrangell Island.

At daylight on April 10 we left our igloo and by the time we got away
the sun had risen. It was a fine, clear day, with a light easterly
wind, which was very cold. Kataktovick complained of his hands and feet
and I suffered a good deal of pain in my arms. The dogs were working
badly and were able to travel only with the greatest difficulty,
though our sledge-load was getting lighter and lighter as the days went
by.

At noon we came to a place where there were two arangas. The men were
all away, gathering driftwood. I tried to make the women understand
that I wanted a dog. I pointed to our dogs and held up four fingers,
then I took one of the dogs and held its head down as if to indicate
that three of our dogs were practically dead. I held up one finger
and pointed to show that I wanted one more dog. The women failed to
understand this lucid pantomime, for which I could hardly blame them,
and we proceeded on our way, hopeful that we could find another aranga
where we could make our needs intelligible.




CHAPTER XXIV

COLT


Shortly after we started, one of the dogs, called Whitey, lay down and
refused to work. Poor old Whitey! He had given all there was in him
and had worn himself out on the hard travelling from Shipwreck Camp to
Wrangell Island and again across Long Strait to Siberia. I unharnessed
him, finally, and put him on the sledge. We now had only three dogs
left to pull the sledge and our progress was not very fast.

About two o’clock in the afternoon we came upon two more arangas. The
native who lived in one of them proved to be a deer man who had hurt
himself some time before and was just beginning to feel better. He had
seven good dogs which excited my interest. I made signs to show him
that we had had seven dogs but had lost all but four, of which one was
already too weak to walk, that we were travelling all the way down to
East Cape, which I indicated on the chart, and that I wanted some dogs.
He was an intelligent man and understood what I was after. He and his
household brought out tea, which was very refreshing and invigorating,
together with frozen deer meat and walrus meat; Kataktovick ate the
walrus meat and I the deer meat. Our host made clear to me that we
could not reach another aranga before nightfall and invited us to stop
with him. We accepted gladly.

The deer man was loath to part with any of his dogs. Finally he said he
would not decide that night but would let me know in the morning. We
were up with the first crack of dawn and had a breakfast of pemmican,
frozen deer meat and tea; then I reopened the subject of the dogs. The
Eskimo said that he would not sell me a dog but would let me take one
if I would send it back from East Cape. I gave him a razor and promised
to do so. Then he showed me his rifle, which was a Remington, and some
cartridges, making signs to ask me if I had any cartridges to pay him
for the use of the dog. I had no Remington cartridges, but took out the
chart and showed him that after reaching East Cape I was going across
to Nome and would send him some cartridges from there. He knew about
Nome; evidently the trading motor-boats from Nome had been up along the
Siberian coast. The dog, as I understood, I could send back from East
Cape by travellers bound west, though the distance was at least three
hundred miles as the crow flies. He told me that there was a white man
at Koliuchin Bay and that Mr. Caraieff, who was a brother of the one I
had met at Cape North, had a fur-trading station at East Cape.

The deer man was an honorable man as well as a trustful one. With the
exception of a razor and a pickaxe which I gave him before we left, he
received nothing but a promise made him in sign language, yet he let us
have one of his best dogs. I asked the native who lived in the other
aranga if he would not go with us as far as Koliuchin Bay. He replied
that he could not leave his family for so long a journey, because they
would probably get nothing to eat. I was sorry for this, but I had
been so warmly welcomed here that I wanted to show my appreciation, so
I gave him a tin of oil to use with the Primus stove that he had, for
which he had had no oil for a long time.

I tried to write down the name of the native to whom I owed the
cartridges but it defied spelling; even the experts in phonetic
spelling would, I think, have had trouble with it. Later on, however,
when I reached Koliuchin Bay I told Mr. Olsen, the American trader
whom I found there, about the arrangement I had made and he easily
identified the man. I am glad to say that I have every reason to
believe that the cartridges which I sent him when I finally reached
Alaska arrived safely.

With our new dog now harnessed to the sledge and Whitey still
a passenger, we got away by the middle of the forenoon and by
mid-afternoon reached another aranga, where we found two women. I tried
to make them understand that I wanted to see the man of the house
and buy a dog from him; there were several pretty good dogs running
around outside the aranga. The women were not very talkative but they
finally managed to make me understand that the men were away, gathering
driftwood. We made ourselves some tea and waited. Kataktovick went into
the aranga and presently returned to tell me that the women had some
flour and were willing to give us some. I hardly knew what we could do
with it and said so.

Kataktovick replied, “Me make flapjacks.”

He got some of the flour and mixed it with melted snow. Then he greased
the cover of the tea boiler with walrus blubber, placed it over the
Primus stove and cooked half a dozen flapjacks. They proved to be
very good, and from that time on, whenever we got a chance, we had
flapjacks; unfortunately chances like this were few and far between.
The day was fine and clear and we had a good view of the hinterland,
which, I found, resembled the coast of Grant Land, where I had been on
my voyages with Peary in the _Roosevelt_.

Presently the men returned, an old man and his son. I asked him for
a dog. He replied—we both, of course, talked in the Esperanto of
signs—that he had only seven and did not care to part with any. I
had a pair of binoculars which I offered him but could not tempt him,
though he was very polite in his refusal to trade. I had with me a new
forty-five calibre Colt revolver, with eighty-three cartridges left,
which I had used to shoot seal. The boy was standing around while we
were carrying on our conversation. I handed him the loaded revolver and
made signs to him to try a shot with it. About thirty yards away was
a stick, standing up in the snow. The boy fired at it and cut it in
two the first shot. He showed his pride and satisfaction plainly and
required little urging to try a shot at another stick a little farther
away. This time he missed; with the next shot, however, he cut this
stick in two. It was good shooting, especially as I do not think he had
ever seen a revolver before.

Turning to the boy, I took a dog with one hand and the revolver with
the other and made signs that if I could have the dog, the revolver was
his. The old man demurred, but the boy took him off where they could
talk the matter over and presently the old man came back and signified
that he would agree to the bargain. Kataktovick looked over the dog he
offered us and we agreed that it was not much good, so I pointed to a
better dog and indicated that he was my choice. The old man shook his
head but offered to let me have the dog if I would add the binoculars
to the revolver. I in turn shook my head, took the revolver and the
cartridges from the boy and prepared to leave. At that the old man gave
in and handed over the dog and a harness; so I gave the revolver and
the cartridges back to the boy, hitched up the dog and we were soon on
our way again. The dog was a strong, little, white fellow, and worked
well. Our old Whitey was well enough now to trot along behind the
sledge, but could do no work yet. Including Whitey we now had six dogs.

It was about three o’clock when we left the old man’s aranga. About
sunset, which now came at seven o’clock, we met a party of Chukches,
with three teams of dogs, bound westward towards Cape North. We stopped
for a few minutes’ conversation and I found that they had come from
Cape Onman at the mouth of Koliuchin Bay. They told me that they would
reach the aranga which we had last left by the time it was dark, which
would be in about an hour and a half. It had taken us four hours to
cover the distance but we were walking whereas the Siberians had from
sixteen to twenty-two dogs to each team and could therefore ride on the
sledges and travel at good speed.

Shortly after we passed these men, we stopped and built our igloo for
the night. We debated how we should manage about the two new dogs that
we had acquired that day, whether we should tether them outside or take
them into the igloo with us. I did not feel like taking any chances on
leaving them outside so we brought them in, with their harness still
on. When we lay down to sleep we tied their traces together and lay on
the traces.

We had had a long and active day and soon fell fast asleep. The
temperature outside was about fifty below zero. Sometime during the
night I woke up, feeling pretty cold. There was a big hole in the side
of the igloo. The dogs had worked their way out of the harness and got
away. We had some tea and as soon as it became light enough I sent
Kataktovick back to the aranga where we had obtained the last dog,
which we called Colt; I thought it likely that the other dog would stop
there, too. I told Kataktovick to get the man to harness up his sledge
and ride back with him to save time. Several hours later Kataktovick
came back with Colt and his late owner and we put Colt into our team
again. The other dog, however, they had not seen; evidently he had
gone right on. I gave the man a tin of pemmican for his trouble and we
went on our way again.

It was long after sunset when we built our igloo for the night. I
determined that Colt should not get away again, so we tied his mouth
to prevent him from chewing his harness and took him into the igloo
with us. In some way, however, he chewed himself free, broke out of the
igloo and escaped. The distance was now too great to send back for him
and I gave up all hope of ever seeing him again.

With our dogs again reduced to four, two of which were of little use,
we got away at five o’clock the next morning. Early in the afternoon
we came upon an old man and a boy, collecting big logs of driftwood. I
asked the old man what he was going to do with the logs, but could not
understand his reply. Perhaps he planned to build a house or a boat.
He had a tent in which he was living and I gathered he was going to
move eastward that afternoon. We made a fire of driftwood and had some
tea and then went on. Kataktovick told me that he understood from the
old man that he would probably overtake us later on and give us a lift
with his sledge. Sure enough, a couple of hours before sunset, he came
up with us and invited us to ride. The snow was light and powdery and
I had been wearing my snowshoes all day. The dogs, too, had made hard
going of it on account of the condition of the snow. I accepted the
old man’s invitation, therefore, to ride on the sledge but after about
ten minutes found it so cold sitting still that I got off, resumed my
snowshoes and walked.

When it was nearly dark we stopped and set up the old man’s big tent.
The northwest wind was growing stronger and the snow was drifting. I
got the Primus stove going and made tea for all four of us and we all
had pemmican. The old man and his son had nothing much of their own to
eat.

We were just finishing our supper when the men with the three
dog-teams, whom we had passed three days before, came up; they had
been to Cape North and were now returning. We filled the Primus stove
again, made them some tea and gave them some pemmican to eat. After
a while they informed me that they had the white dog Colt that had
got away from us. The old man had sent him back by them. I was taken
completely by surprise and to say that I was glad to see him would be
putting it mildly. Nothing could have exceeded that old man’s honesty
and generosity; once he had gone to the trouble of bringing Colt back
himself, and now he had sent him back. It was simply one of the many
instances of fine humanity which I met with among these Chukches. All
honor and gratitude to them!

The new arrivals and ourselves sat in the tent and attempted
conversation. They were sociable and friendly, like all the others whom
we met, but Kataktovick, as I afterwards learned, never quite succeeded
in conquering his misgivings. It was difficult to make them understand
and sometimes I would get excited and talk in loud and emphatic tones.
This would arouse Kataktovick’s fears and he would say: “You must not
talk that way.” He was afraid they would misunderstand my earnestness
and take offense. The same thing had happened before and Kataktovick
was always afraid of the consequences.

On the fourteenth we had a high westerly gale. The men with the three
dog teams got away before we did. They said our dogs were slow and they
were in a hurry. I tried to buy a dog from them with my binoculars but
could not tempt them.

Leaving the old man and his son in their big tent we left early in the
morning, with the high wind at our backs, and made fairly good going
all day. At noon we reached an aranga and had some tea. Then we went
on again and about five o’clock came to another aranga. Near by was an
empty tent. We entered and in a few minutes an old man came in from
the aranga and made signs that he would make us some tea if we wanted
it. He went back to the aranga and presently returned with a brand new
copper kettle, holding about two gallons. He said we could use it and
that he would get the ice to fill it if we would provide the fire and
the tea. I saw that it was going to take some time to make tea, so we
went along, but as the old man seemed to be pretty badly off I gave him
some pemmican and tea tablets.

At dark we built our igloo. I took Colt inside with us and tied his
mouth, taking a half hitch on the rope so that he could not chew. Then
I put three or four turns of the rope criss-cross on the harness so
that he could not extricate himself, and tied the rope to myself. The
result was that with his continuous restlessness I got no sleep all
night. It was the last time I tried that device; after that I simply
tethered him with the rest of the dogs.




CHAPTER XXV

“MUSIC HATH CHARMS”


The next morning dawned clear and fine. We got away early and had good
going, so that by noon we reached an aranga not far from Cape Wankarem.
We were received kindly here and given tea, which was all that the
house afforded. I left some tea tablets in exchange.

Proceeding on our way again we reached Cape Wankarem at five o’clock
in the afternoon; the cape is not high land, just a low promontory. We
found four arangas here. Our usual method when we came to a place with
more than one aranga was to look the whole collection over and go to
what seemed the most likely one of the lot. Here, therefore, we passed
one or two which seemed only ordinary and stopped before the one which
seemed the best. An old man came out and made signs for us to enter.
We did so and as soon as we were inside the door an old woman took us
in charge. She removed our boots and stockings, turned them inside out
and hung them up to dry over the native lamp. Then she brought out her
best china and we had tea with sugar in it. She had two fine-looking
daughters who helped wait upon us. The aranga was scrupulously
clean, with plenty of furs; evidently the master of the house was in
comfortable circumstances.

When we had finished our tea the old man made signs that he wanted to
see my chart; clearly the men who had gone on ahead of us, the previous
day, had told him about us, and he wanted to see for himself. I brought
out the chart and showed it to him. He examined it carefully and made
signs about the crushing of the ship. Presently he went to a box and
produced a number of magazines, perhaps ten or a dozen in all, most
of them about two years old. There were copies of _The World’s Work_,
_The National Geographic Magazine_, _The Literary Digest_ and _The
Illustrated London News_. The day’s march in the cold wind, following
the long succession of such days, with the hours of searching through
the whirling snowdrift for the right path from Wrangell Island and the
glare of the sun along the tundra, had affected my eyes more and more
severely. By this time, besides being pretty tired and sleepy, I felt
more like giving my eyes a rest than trying to read. I could hardly
make out the print and it hurt my eyes a good deal, so I made signs to
our host and he understood at once and did not urge the magazines upon
me.

Fortunately, too, relief came in the person of another old man, who
entered the aranga just then. He was evidently a crony of our host,
for without more ado both fell to playing casino, like a couple of old
veterans playing cards in their club.

After a time, I fell asleep and had a refreshing nap. When I awoke,
the card-players were still at it. After a while they finished their
game and then our host got out a box. It looked very much like a
talking-machine and I remember thinking, “What in the name of Heaven is
that?” Then he removed a cloth from another box and took out a record
and I saw that it was indeed a talking-machine. The old man acted just
like an American householder who proudly plays you the latest record
by Caruso or John McCormack. He treated us to an extended concert,
numbering forty-two selections, starting off with “My Hero” from “The
Chocolate Soldier.” About half of the songs were in Russian and the
rest in English. Like the true music-lover, he kept on playing until he
had finished all of his forty-two records, while the old lady busied
herself mending our clothes. I was so sleepy that I am afraid I dropped
off several times during the concert but I enjoyed it just the same.

The old man now passed over to me a tumbler and a spoon, together with
a bottle which contained some kind of patent “painkiller.” Then he
brought out a sick boy about fifteen years old and made signs to me
to give the youngster a dose of the painkiller. The tumbler and spoon
and bottle were all carefully wrapped up in a neat package and I could
see that the old man prized this medicine kit of his as much as an
Arctic explorer might value a medal. The directions on the bottle were
printed in English. As nearly as I could find out, the boy had received
his last treatment some time during the previous summer; evidently
the doses were given him only when some one happened along who could
read the directions. I took the bottle and the spoon and measured out
the proper quantity in the glass, added water and administered it to
my patient in a very solemn manner, just as if I were a real doctor.
I don’t suppose there was enough of it to do the youngster any real
harm; certainly he did not receive medical attention often enough to do
him permanent injury. I was very deliberate in my actions; in fact I
believe I consumed fully half an hour in the process.

I enjoyed here the best night’s sleep I had had since I had left
Shipwreck Camp, nearly two months before. In the morning the old
woman presented me with a fine pair of deerskin mittens. I gave her a
gill-net. To the boy I gave a pocket compass and divided a yard or two
of ribbon between the girls. We got away shortly after day-light. Our
treatment at the kind hands of this Chukch family will always remain in
my memory.

The old man seemed to realize that we had great need for getting along
as fast as we could and he volunteered to give us a lift to the next
aranga nine or ten miles away. He said nothing about going until he
harnessed up his dogs just as we were starting. It was a great help and
enabled us to get along so well that we covered the distance by nine
o’clock. At this next aranga we met four Russian prospectors who were
on their way from East Cape to Cape North, near which are gold mines.
They were well-equipped travellers. Each had a sledge with a team of
twelve fine dogs. They treated us to black bread, butter, tea, sugar
and sardines. One of them could speak a little English; he wrote his
name for me on a piece of paper which, I am sorry to say, I lost.

We had two snow-knives with us and when we now said goodby to the
old native who had been so kind to us, I gave him one of these, with
a couple of steel drills which we used for making holes for the
sledge-shoes, and a skein of fish-line.

Travelling all day long, we came some time after the sun went down to
a place where there were three arangas. The Russian miners had told us
about them and had said they thought we should be able to reach them by
nightfall. Two of the arangas were close together and the third was
off by itself. The people here were less hospitably inclined than those
whom we had met before and, though they did not actually tell us to
keep away, they did not volunteer any invitation to enter. It was dark
and we had come a long distance, so I did not feel like spending an
hour building an igloo for shelter for the night; I went up to one of
the arangas, therefore, and when a young man came out I made signs that
we should like to stop there. When we finally got inside I understood
why the people were not especially glad to see us. They had evidently
had hard luck and had very little food, even for themselves. While
Kataktovick was outside feeding the dogs, I got the Primus stove going,
made some tea and passed it around, with pemmican.

There was a young woman here, with a baby two or three months old who
was evidently sick; he was what would be described, I believe, as
“fussy.” His mother would get him quiet and then he would cry out and
to my great surprise she would get very angry and shake him violently;
then she would repent and would croon to him, only to repeat the
shaking when the poor little fellow cried out again. In all my long
experience with Eskimo I had never before seen a woman even speak a
cross word to her child.

Perhaps she could not get along with her mother-in-law and took it out
on her baby. At all events the mother-in-law, who was very old, was
a tough customer. Quite unknowingly I sat down in her place and fell
asleep. Some time after midnight I was awakened by a smart slap on the
cheek. I was too drowsy to pay much attention to this but presently was
brought up broad awake by having the old woman step on my face. I found
her snorting and grunting; the young mother was still crooning and
talking to the baby. I had all my clothes on, so I shook Kataktovick
and we went outdoors.

The light was just showing along the eastern horizon. We made a little
snow shelter, had some tea and pemmican and started on our way about
two o’clock in the morning. We travelled hard all day. There was a
strong northwest gale and the air was filled with drifting snow so that
we could not see very far ahead. When we came to Cape Onman we were
disappointed to find no arangas there; only the framework was left
and we found out later that the people had moved to Koliuchin Island.
We kept along the trail, which to our surprise took us away from the
land and out on to the ice on the broad entrance to Koliuchin Bay, and
presently we came to Koliuchin Island, a high formation, like a warship
bottom up.

Here we found ten or a dozen arangas and visible signs of prosperity.
A young man came out on our approach and said, “Me speek ’em plenty
English. Me know Nome. Me know trader well. Me spend long time East
Cape. You come in aranga. Me speak ’em plenty. You get plenty eat here.”

We went in. It was a well-appointed Siberian home, occupied jointly
by two young men and their families. The men were deer men, with fine
herds of reindeer twelve or fourteen days’ journey into the interior.
We had some tea and some frozen deer meat. Then the women cooked
us some seal meat, which was excellent. The older man’s wife made
flapjacks out of flour and they tasted good.

These people had evidently heard about us and they knew our desire to
get to East Cape, for after we had finished eating, the native who had
first greeted us said, “I bring you East Cape; how much?”

I asked him how many dogs he had. He told me, and said he had a good
sledge, too, and could get us to East Cape in five days, if we were to
start at once.

I had with me forty-five dollars which Mr. Hadley had lent me when I
left Wrangell Island. Naturally I wanted to keep this sum intact as
long as possible. To get to East Cape in five days, however, would
justify me in parting with my money.

“How much you pay me?” the man asked again.

“Forty dollars,” I replied, for the trip seemed to me well worth that.
It was a mistake; I should have said twenty. Forty was so large a sum
that the native soon made clear that he doubted my having so much
money. He was a trader, for reindeer skins and fox skins, and he knew,
or thought he knew, how a bargain should be made.

“All right,” he said. “You show me money.”

“No,” I replied.

“Maybe you no have money,” he ventured.

“I have the money,” I answered.

In his anxiety to see that I should not suffer in the Chukch’s
estimation, Kataktovick now started to explain to him about the money
and I had to stop him.

“You bring me East Cape me give you forty dollars.”

The Chukch seemed satisfied. It was agreed that we should leave our
sledge and about all our possessions and that we should journey onward
on the deer man’s sledge. At Koliuchin Bay we should find an American
trader, Mr. Olsen, about whom I had been hearing all along the coast.
As far as Mr. Olsen’s the other deer man was to accompany us with his
sledge, Kataktovick riding with him; for this service he was to receive
a hatchet, a piece of tent canvas and two tins of pemmican.

The next morning, April 19, Kataktovick complained of pains in his legs
and wanted to stay where we were for a day to rest. I did not object to
the idea and was glad of an opportunity of resting the dogs.

That night our prospective tourist conductor began talking again about
the money. Evidently he was worried, or else his conscience pricked him.

“By and by you meet Olsen,” he said. “He white man. Perhaps he tell you
you pay me too much money. You no pay me.”

I replied that whatever Mr. Olsen might tell me would make no
difference, that I had promised to pay and I would. I refused to let
him see the money, however, though he was itching to get a look at it.
“You no trust me, I no trust you,” I said.

Then he voiced the age-old cry of the savage against the civilized; the
pity of it is that the savage is right.

“White man steal from other man,” he said. “White man promise bring
things for fox skins and bear skins. White man no bring ’em. White man
go ’way, forget come back.”

I could not deny it, but I repeated my statement that I would pay him
forty dollars if he brought me to East Cape.

There was silence for a while; then he said he would do it.




CHAPTER XXVI

WE ARRIVE AT EAST CAPE


The next morning, April 19, we started off with the two sledges. I had
our own dogs harnessed in the team that drew the sledge on which I rode
and had with me the pemmican that we had left and other essentials, so
that about all that we finally left behind was our sledge. I should
have liked to keep the sledge and bring it all the way home with me,
but the Chukches liked the looks of it and they would find it useful
in travelling over the rough ice. I could get along without it, and I
was beginning now to feel the long strain and wanted to hurry on by the
fastest means possible.

As we travelled, two to each sledge, one man would ride while the
other walked. The sledges used by the natives, from Cape North east,
are about sixteen feet long, two-and-a-half feet wide and eight inches
high. The framework is light and rather crudely made. The runners are
four inches wide. When the snow is hard they do not use steel shoes;
instead they coat the runners with ice. They always keep a bottle of
water inside their clothing and carry a piece of bearskin with them.
At frequent intervals during the day they pour water on the bearskin
and rub it over the runners; it freezes quickly and forms a coating of
ice which reduces the friction, whereas a steel shoe in extreme cold
has a tendency to cling to the snow. When the weather gets warm enough
so that the snow is at the melting stage they use the steel shoes.

They seldom use a whip; instead they are more likely to use a stick
about three feet long with a heavy spear-point on the end. Along this
stick are several rings which jingle and rattle against each other and
make the dogs quicken their speed. They use this stick as a brake when
the sledge is going down hill, setting it up at the forward end and
letting the spear-point scratch along; in this way they keep the sledge
from running over the dogs. They have large teams of dogs and can get
over the ground rapidly. If all went well we should now be able to make
far greater progress than had been possible with our small number of
worn-out dogs.

We went back across the entrance to Koliuchin Bay to Cape Onman and
followed the bay shore to a point about fifteen miles from Mr. Olsen’s
place. About two hours before we reached the aranga where we were to
spend the night my guide stopped the sledge and informed me that he was
not going to East Cape with me. He said he would go on to the aranga
and the other man would take us on to Mr. Olsen’s place and then we
could go on by ourselves.

“How about the forty dollars?” I asked. “Don’t you want it?”

He had been thinking things over, he said, and he had decided that as
he had a lot of deerskins back in the country and must get them before
some one else did, the money I had agreed to pay him was not enough
to compensate him for the risk he would take, for if he went clear
through to East Cape he would get back too late. The fact was, as I
could easily see, that he knew that forty dollars was much too high a
price for the job he had undertaken, and he was afraid that if I got to
a place where I could talk with some white man about it, I would learn
that and refuse to pay. Apparently he had little confidence in a white
man’s word.

I listened to the explanation he offered about the deerskins and said,
“All right,—we will let it go at that.”

We came to our stopping-place on the western shore of Koliuchin Bay
late in the afternoon. The man who lived in the aranga came out and
asked me in. I saw to it that everything that I had on the sledge was
taken off and put in the aranga and that our five dogs were fed and
cared for. I was just pulling off my boots and stockings when the man
from Koliuchin Island came in and said, “Me want money to bring you
here.”

“Not a cent!” I answered. He was silent for some time. Then I decided
that I would show him that I could be a good sport, so I said I would
give him five dollars. I showed him the forty-five dollars that I
carried with me and said that if he had taken me to East Cape he would
have had the four ten-dollar bills. He said never a word but took the
five-dollar bill that I handed over to him and without waiting to thank
me started back over the road. And now we had no sledge.

That night I made a bargain with another native to get us to Mr.
Olsen’s place, giving him as pay a snow-knife, a small pickaxe and two
steel drills. We left at early dawn the next morning, travelling with
all our goods and chattels on the sledge. Our dogs were harnessed with
his, though they were so tired that they could barely keep up.

About noon we reached Mr. Olsen’s place. Mr. Olsen, I found, was a
naturalized American citizen, thirty-eight years old, a trader known
all up and down the coast. He was the agent of Mr. Olaf Swenson of
Seattle, who was later to play so important a part in the rescue of our
men.

The summer before he had learned of our expedition from Mr. Swenson and
others who had been up to Koliuchin Bay with supplies. It was a great
surprise to him to see me here now. His hospitality was unbounded;
everything he had was at our disposal. He made some tea for us at once,
and offered us bread, also made by himself, which was as good as any I
have ever eaten. I am ashamed to think of the amount of this bread that
I ate; no Christmas cake or plum pudding ever tasted better. After our
meal I enjoyed a smoke of his good tobacco and then we turned in. Mr.
Olsen made me take his own bunk and I had a refreshing sleep.

The man who had accompanied us here now went back, so the next morning,
after a good deal of trouble, Mr. Olsen got another man with a sledge
and a dog team. With the exception of Colt, our dogs were still very
tired. Most of the dogs belonging to the people at Koliuchin Bay were
away in various directions hunting. Mr. Olsen used his influence,
however, and we were able to get away in good season, with a good
sledge and a full dogteam. The driver and ourselves all took turns; two
of us would walk while the other rode.

During the day we passed Pitlekaj, the point where the _Vega_,
Nordenskiöld’s ship, on the voyage on which she made the Northeast
Passage, became frozen in the ice, on September 28, 1878, when only
a few days’ run from Bering Strait and scarcely six miles from open
water, and did not again get free until July 18, 1879. The _Vega_,
fortunately, encountered no such terrific gale as that which drove
the _Karluk_ westward in September, 1913, but her mishap in being
frozen in the ice was quite as unexpected and her situation quite as
uncontrollable.

Several times during the day’s march we stopped at an aranga for tea.
At six o’clock we reached an aranga near Idlidlija Island. We were now
half way from Koliuchin Bay to Cape Serdze. For his services I paid
the old man who had accompanied us here a small spade, two packages
of tobacco and an order on Mr. Olsen for fifteen dollars’ worth of
supplies. I had now given away nearly all the things we had had with us
when we started from Wrangell Island.

After another restful night and a good meal of salmon, we left early
the next morning, April 22, for Cape Serdze. By a little bargaining I
had obtained the services of a native with his sledge and dogs and as
I found another native about to start on his way eastward at the same
time I got him to take Kataktovick along with him. This arrangement
gave us two men to each sledge, which would result in better progress.

It was a wonderful day. The temperature was only a little below the
freezing-point and the sun’s rays were distinctly warm. The sunlight,
in fact, coupled with the glare of the snow, was hard on my eyes.
At Koliuchin Island I had had an Eskimo woman make me a cap out
of Burberry cloth that we had with us, with a three-inch vizor of
sealskin, supported by copper wire around the rim. I wore my hood over
this cap and could adjust the vizor at any angle; this afforded some
relief to my eyes.

At three o’clock in the afternoon we arrived at Cape Serdze. Here
we were met by Mr. Wall, a Norwegian, of about forty, who was an
electrical engineer, by profession, had lived in the United States
and knew people in Boston and New York whom I knew. He lived in a
very comfortable aranga but there was sickness in the house so, with
apologies for his inability to entertain us, he sent us to an aranga
owned by a native who went by the name of Corrigan, the best-known
hunter in Siberia. Corrigan showed me some of the results of his
season’s hunting, which included fifteen or twenty fine polar-bear
skins and a large number of skins of the white fox. He was by far the
most prosperous native I had met. Mr. Wall sent me over some bread and
tea and milk, with some excellent griddle-cakes.

With Mr. Wall’s assistance I was able to obtain the services of
Corrigan to take us to East Cape, a distance of about ninety miles. I
left here everything that would be of no further use to us, for I knew
now that during the remainder of our journey we should be able to
get anything we needed. With the exception of the day when we got to
Koliuchin Island we had had fine weather all the way from Cape North;
now it was even better because every day the sun was getting higher and
its heat more perceptible.

From Cape Serdze eastward the water is deep near the shore and the
travelling in places along the sea-ice was rough, because the drift ice
came close to shore. We had a good many steep inclines to go down and
had exciting experiences, especially as we went along at top speed.
Corrigan, however, was a daring and capable dog-driver, and knew how
to steer the sledge as well as a man can steer a ship. He had sixteen
dogs, all of the very best quality, and where the going was good we
travelled very fast. Corrigan had a chum who went along with us with
some of Corrigan’s dogs and ours. Kataktovick travelled with this other
man.

At several points along the way we passed groups of arangas perched
on shelves projecting out from the face of the cliffs, a hundred feet
above the shore. In some cases it was hard to see how the natives could
climb up into them; they reminded me of pictures I had seen of the
homes of the cliff-dwellers. The natives live on these heights because
they want to be on the coast near the walrus and seal and can find no
other location for their arangas.

We made fifty miles during the day. It was light nearly all of the
twenty-four hours now and we were able to keep going until seven
o’clock in the evening, before stopping at a very comfortable aranga
for the night.

Sitting on the sledge so long, when I had not been used to it, made my
back ache and the pain was so great that I did not sleep at all; in
fact, I had a miserable night. The air in the aranga, too, was very hot.

The next day we got away shortly after daybreak. The going was rough in
many places and we had to travel close under the cliffs. It was a warm
day, with a temperature about freezing; where the sun’s rays struck the
angles of the cliffs water was dropping. There was, in fact, a good
deal of danger in passing along under the cliffs, for the heat of the
sun was releasing the boulders that the frost had dislodged during the
winter and now they came tearing down the face of the cliff without
warning straight across our path.

As we journeyed on the pleasant warmth of the sun’s rays made the
ride a rather more enjoyable excursion than we had been experiencing
before on our travels. At times Corrigan and I attempted conversation.
He could speak very little English and though I had picked up a few
phrases along the coast I could speak no native language that he could
understand. He was considered the dare-devil of northern Siberia and
had such a reputation for taking chances that it was said that when
Corrigan could not get a bear it was because bear were scarce and
it would not be worth while for any one else to try. Mr. Wall had
told Corrigan what I had said about our voyage and shipwreck and our
experiences since. Now, while we were riding along, Corrigan would
start in to tell me of his exploits. I knew just enough of the language
to recognize an occasional word when he described hunting the walrus
and polar bear and the narrow escapes he had had on the drift ice and
hunting whale in skin-boats with the harpoon. He would get more and
more excited, and finally I would cease to understand anything and
could do nothing but nod at frequent intervals, until he would become
aware of my total ignorance of what he was saying; then he would put
his hands to his head, with a gesture of despair. He became greatly
excited and irritated when he found that neither of us could relate his
adventures to the other. It was all very amusing to me, especially as
when I had first heard his name mentioned I had thought of him as an
Irishman.

Stopping at intervals along the way to have tea in the various
arangas that we passed, we finally reached Emma Town, a few miles to
the southwest of East Cape, at about six P.M. The second stage of our
journey from Wrangell Island was over. We had been thirty-seven days
on the march and probably had actually travelled about seven hundred
miles, all but the last part of the way on foot. There now remained
the question of transportation to Alaska, and the sooner I was able to
arrange for that the better.




CHAPTER XXVII

WITH BARON KLEIST TO EMMA HARBOR


At Emma Town I found the brother of the Mr. Caraieff whom I had met at
Cape North. I presented my letter of introduction and was hospitably
received. Mr. Caraieff, I found, was a graduate of a college at
Vladivostock. He was able to carry on a conversation with me in quite
intelligible English and had no difficulty in understanding me. He
invited me to stay at his home as long as I liked. I thanked him but
said that I must get over to the American shore as soon as possible.

We talked over ways and means. The ice in Bering Strait, I found, had
broken up so that I should be unable to get across by sledge; later on
I could get a whale-boat, he said, with some Eskimo, to take me across
to the Diomede Islands and from there another whale-boat or a skin-boat
to get across to Cape Prince of Wales. That would be some time in May,
just when would depend entirely on the amount of ice in the waters of
the Strait. The present was a kind of between-season time when it was
too late for sledges and too early for boats. It would be June before
any ships would get to East Cape.

It seemed to me that my best chance of getting immediately in touch
with Ottawa would be to go south to Anadyr and send a message from the
wireless station there. Mr. Caraieff was inclined to think that the
season was already so advanced that I would not really save any time
in that way, because the ice would be breaking up in the rivers that I
must cross on the way and there was an even chance that when I reached
Anadyr I might find that the wireless was out of commission, in which
event my journey would be in vain. At Emma Harbor on Providence Bay was
a Mr. Thompson, he said, who had a schooner with a gasoline engine. He
would be leaving for Nome the first week in June and would take me with
him.

Thinking things over I felt that the trip to Anadyr would be worth
the risk, for even if the wireless were out of commission there I
could still get across to Nome, so the next day, with Mr. Caraieff’s
assistance, I made all arrangements with some natives to take me to
Indian Point, where I could get some other natives to take me on to
Anadyr. We planned to start in a day or so and I considered the matter
settled, when over night, so to speak, came a rapidly increasing
swelling in my legs and feet, due, I suppose, to the punishment they
had received, and before I realized it I found myself a helpless
invalid, forced to accept Mr. Caraieff’s kind hospitality.

My host had a Russian servant by the name of Koshimuroff, who was
most assiduous in his efforts to restore my legs to their normal
condition, massaging them faithfully at Mr. Caraieff’s direction.
He filled a large pork-barrel about half full of warm water and I
took the first bath I had had since I left Shipwreck Camp. He also
cut my hair, what there was left of it; the constant use of the hood
had literally worn much of it off the top of my head; several months
elapsed before it grew out again. I also shaved, and when I saw myself
in the looking-glass, after shaving and having my hair cut, I hardly
recognized myself.

My stay here was made pleasant by the opportunity I had, when my eyes
became more nearly normal, to read the magazines which Mr. Charles
Carpendale, an Australian-born trader, with a station at the same place
as Mr. Caraieff’s, brought me. These had been sent across from Nome the
previous summer and were not what might be described in the language of
the train-boy as “all the latest magazines,” but they were a pleasure
to me, just the same, as they are to all the traders who are scattered
up and down the Siberian coast.

The third day after my arrival I was sitting alone in the front room
of Mr. Caraieff’s house when in walked a Russian gentleman who shook
hands with me and introduced himself in English as Baron Kleist, the
Supervisor of Northeastern Siberia. He passed on in search of my host
and shortly afterwards returned with him and we all sat and talked,
while I showed the Baron my charts. I had been looking for him for
several days, for I knew that he had left his home at Emma Harbor
shortly after New Year’s Day and had been on an inspection trip, across
country to Koliuchin Bay and eastward along the coast, ever since. He
was now bound home again.

He had heard of me from Mr. Olsen at Koliuchin Bay and had been told
by him that I was a man of fifty-five or so. “I see that you are much
younger than I was told you were,” he said. Later on in the progress of
our pleasant acquaintance, as I began to show the good effects of rest
and substantial food, he said, “You’re getting younger every day. After
all there is not much difference in our ages.” He was a man of about
forty, only a few years older than myself.

He told us all the news. It was two months old but I had heard hardly
any news of the outside world for nearly a year. Nothing unusual had
happened or seemed likely to happen. Peace reigned everywhere. He told
us of the discovery the previous year of Nicholas II Land off the
Taimir Peninsula by the Russian ships _Taimir_ and _Vaigatch_ under the
command of Captain Vilkitski, an achievement of which as a Russian he
might be justly proud.

Baron Kleist discussed with me the best course for me to pursue in
getting word to the Canadian Government. He planned to leave about May
10 for Emma Harbor, he said, and he asked me to go along with him and
be his guest at his home. Mr. Caraieff from Cape North had come to East
Cape about the time the baron arrived, and I had made arrangements for
him to take me to Emma Harbor, so it was arranged that we should all
travel together. Kataktovick I would leave at East Cape; we had taken
him on at Point Barrow, but he said he wanted to go to Point Hope. I
could give him provisions and outfit enough to last him for some time
and, after navigation opened, he could get a ship to take him across to
Point Hope.

Corrigan went back to Cape Serdze. Before he left he begged very hard
for my binoculars, so I finally gave them to him on condition that he
would never part with them; this he promised faithfully.

My rest was gradually putting me in condition to travel again. At
first I was almost as helpless as a child. I suffered no pain, but the
swelling in my legs and feet was severe and I seemed to have lost
every bit of energy I had ever possessed. My eyes were bloodshot and I
was so stiff I could hardly move hand or foot. Kataktovick had little
swelling but suffered a good deal of pain in his legs. We were both
pretty thin; I had lost thirty or forty pounds and Kataktovick was
equally worn down.

Before I began to recover from this swelling of the legs, I developed
an acute attack of tonsilitis. It was the first trouble of the kind
that I had experienced in all my Arctic work. I recall that on the
North Pole expedition, while we were encamped at Cape Sheridan and most
of us were away on hunting trips, MacMillan and Doctor Goodsell opened
a case of books and both came down with violent head colds. The books
were brand new books, too; apparently they had been packed by a man
with a cold. The baron had a clinical thermometer with him and he found
that my temperature was well above normal. My throat was ulcerated
and sore but I used peroxide and alum and after a time the infection
subsided.

When the tenth of May came, however, the tonsilitis was still with me
and I was conscious that it had weakened my whole system for the time
being, in addition to the physical weariness of which the swelling in
my legs and feet was a symptom. The baron was anxious to get away, for
the season was advancing, and, at any moment, a thaw might set in which
would break up the ice in the rivers and interfere with the journey. My
legs and feet had more strength in them by now but I could not walk as
well as usual. So it was decided that, as we were now ready, we might
as well start.

Kataktovick saw us off; we were parting, here. I thanked him, as I
bade him good-by, for all that he had done, and told him how greatly I
was indebted to him for his constant help and for his faith and trust
in me. The money due him would be paid to him later on, I said, after
I had got back to civilization. I asked Mr. Carpendale to tell the
Chukches what a good boy Kataktovick was. I gave him the rifle we had
carried on our journey and some other things we had with us, and then
we shook hands warmly and parted.

The day was not a cold one; the thermometer, in fact, was about
freezing and there was a good deal of fog. Consequently, the travelling
was not so easy as it might have been but we had good dogs and good
drivers, and, as we had postponed our start until the late afternoon
when the snow was beginning to get harder, we made considerable
progress before we stopped at ten P.M. at an aranga for tea and bear
meat. We then kept on our way until four o’clock in the morning—the
light was sufficient now for travelling all through the twenty-four
hours—and then we reached another aranga, where we slept. We had
intended to make an aranga still further on before stopping but the
snow was soft and the fog was so thick that we had difficulty in
telling where we were, so we decided not to risk too much in the face
of such adverse weather conditions but to stop while we could.

We drank our tea and turned in. At about eleven A. M. we awoke and
breakfasted on some things we had brought with us from East Cape. It
was now snowing very hard and there was no use in setting out, so we
decided to wait until night. At six P. M. it was snowing harder than
ever, so there was nothing to do but to have supper and turn in again.
During the day I read a good deal. Mr. Carpendale had given the baron
some books and now, as later on in the journey, when I could not sleep
I would read. I recall that at this time I was absorbed in Robert
Hichens’s “Bella Donna.” The light inside the aranga was poor so I
bundled myself up in my furs and sat in the outer apartment among the
dogs and sledges where I could see.

My own dogs I had left with Mr. Caraieff at East Cape. He agreed to
keep them until I should want them again. The problem of feeding our
dogs along the way to Emma Harbor promised to be a fairly pressing one
and so it proved; in fact, the baron was constantly worried by it. The
season had advanced and the supply of meat which the natives had laid
in during the previous fall was beginning to be exhausted.

The snow turned again to rain during the night of the twelfth and it
looked very much as if we should be unable to travel. My throat was
gradually getting better but was still sore and painful. We ate a good
supper of reindeer meat well cooked by the baron and went to bed.

Not long after midnight the rain held up and the wind, which had
shifted to the northwest, cleared the air and lowered the temperature,
so that a crust formed on the snow and the going was fairly good. We
got away at about two o’clock on the morning of May 13, and for a while
made good time, but before long the wind dropped and veered to the
southeast, bringing in a pelting rain from Bering Sea. I had tried to
get an oilskin coat at East Cape but could find none to fit me; my fur
clothing got soaked through after a while and, though it was a rather
warm rain, I was afraid of a recurrence of the tonsilitis. Occasionally
I dropped off the sledge for exercise to keep warm but my legs were
still weak and I could not keep up with the dogs, so I had to get on
again and ride. As the temperature grew colder the rain turned to a
very wet snow-storm, accompanied by a thick fog. We could hardly see
ahead of the dogs and steered altogether by compass.

We were bound for a reindeer settlement half way along the north side
of St. Lawrence Bay and after a while we brought up at what seemed
to the natives a place they knew; on looking around, however, they
discovered that they were uncertain where they were. Working our way
along slowly, we finally got out to the slopes of the bay shore and
stopped. The Eskimo were deep in a discussion of where they were and,
as the baron told me, seemed clear enough about it, when suddenly the
dogs started, pell-mell. I managed to drop on to the sledge and before
I could do more than catch my breath we were tearing down hill at a
terrific pace. The dogs had scented the reindeer and had started in
their direction without more ado. How we got along without being flung
bodily against the numerous boulders that lined our pathway and killed
outright, I never knew; we reached the bottom of the slope without a
mishap. Here we came across a trail which brought us to the settlement.

The reindeer here were the first I had seen in Siberia; they had spent
the winter inland, but now that spring was opening they had come out to
the coast. The two young men who owned them were fine, tall fellows,
somewhat resembling North American Indians; they had been out with
their reindeer in all weathers during the winter, sometimes, the baron
told me, for three days in succession, and their faces were burned
almost black with cold and exposure. They were very hospitable and, as
they had just cooked some reindeer meat as we dropped in, they gave
us an enjoyable meal. My appetite was beginning to come back and my
throat, in spite of the rain and fog, was better.

Refreshed and reassured as to our progress we started on our way again,
crossing the ice of St. Lawrence Bay and following its shores to the
east. We then went across the land for several miles and out on to the
ice in the mouth of Mechigme Bay. This journey was full of interest to
me. I rode most of the time and could give myself up to the enjoyment
of the wild country through which we were passing. The distance from
East Cape to Emma Harbor is about the same as that from New York
to Boston. We averaged four or five miles an hour. Our dog-drivers
were skilful and knew what they were about; their conversation was
unintelligible to me but I had every confidence in their ability.

One of our drivers was about four feet tall; in an Anglo-Saxon
community, I suppose, he would have been known as Goliath, but among
these more literal-minded Siberians he was called “Little.” He had a
small motor-boat at Indian Point and, if I could not get a ship at Emma
Harbor, it would be a great convenience for Little if I went across to
Alaska in his motor-boat, because he wanted to go over to Nome, anyway,
when the season was far enough advanced for the voyage and I could be
navigator, an arrangement which, as a possibility, was quite agreeable
to me.

Little, like Artemus Ward’s bear, was “an amoosin’ little cuss.” He
could manage to understand pidgin English and was well pleased with
himself over it. “Me make baron speak plenty English,” he would say.

From Mechigme Bay we followed the coast west for a short distance and
then crossed the mouth of the bay to the south shore; following the
coast for about twenty miles we went across the land to Neegchan. It
was foggy all the time and when we reached a group of arangas at a
place called Mesigman and stopped to sleep, I was wet to the skin. The
aranga where we were entertained, however, was warm and comfortable; I
took off my clothes, wrapped myself in a nice deerskin robe and went to
sleep.

At six o’clock in the afternoon we started on again. The weather had
cleared up and the surface of the snow was hard, so the going was
wonderfully good. For some time we travelled over the sea-ice and had
to make a wide detour to avoid a long lane of open water. We stopped
once at an aranga on the way for tea and at four o’clock reached a
place called Elewn. Here we stayed until six o’clock in the afternoon,
when we again got away for an all-night journey.

We were now on the last lap and the dogs knew it, so they travelled at
even greater speed than before. At one point as we were going along,
we met a Chukch woman driving a team of dogs. Our drivers stopped and
talked with her. The baron asked me what I thought about her; his
question rather puzzled me but I replied that I supposed the woman was
driving the dogs and doing other things that men do, just as I had been
accustomed to see women doing among the other Eskimo whom I had known.
Then he said that, on the contrary, this was really not a woman at all
but a man who had, so to speak, turned himself into a woman. It was, it
seemed, a custom among these Siberians to do this and a man who thus
transformed himself acted like a woman, dressed like a woman, talked
like a woman and was looked upon by the other Chukches as a woman. The
baron knew the whys and wherefores of this extraordinary custom but
when he tried to explain it to me his English proved unequal to the
occasion.

Several times during the day we stopped to have tea. At one place the
Eskimo told us that they had seen or heard of a whaler at Indian Point.
The master was Captain Pederson, they said, but when they described
the ship, their account did not tally with the description of the
_Elvira_, the ship that Captain Pederson commanded when the _Karluk_
left Nome. It was afterwards to be made known to me that the _Elvira_
had been crushed and sunk off the northern coast of Alaska the previous
fall, during the stormy season when we were being driven offshore in
the _Karluk_, and that Captain Pederson had made his way overland
to Fairbanks, had thence gone to San Francisco and taken command of
another ship, the _Herman_.

After we left the ice of Chechokium we crossed the divide to Emma
Harbor. The mist lay low over the high mountains on the peninsula
between Emma Harbor and Providence Bay. From time to time the wind
would roll this mist away and reveal the peaks, stern and forbidding.
The going up the divide was steep and we had a hard climb; when we got
to the top I could look down to Emma Harbor and see open water out
into Providence Bay. The land was white with snow and the ice nearer
shore was unbroken, so that the open water beyond seemed as black as
coal-tar, shining against the white. We went down the other side of the
ridge at a terrific rate, the dogs running free and the sledge, with
the brake-pole grinding hard, careening from side to side in a way that
almost took a man’s breath away.

It was at seven o’clock on the morning of May 16 that we reached Emma
Harbor and the home of Baron Kleist. We had been six days coming from
East Cape and two months had gone by since I had parted from the men
on Icy Spit, Wrangell Island. If all went well I should be back for
them in two months more and I hoped they were holding out all right
and would be in good shape when I reached them again. Their suspense,
I knew, would be acute until they were sure that I had succeeded in
crossing Long Strait to Siberia and getting over to Alaska.

Baron Kleist had a fine house at Emma Harbor. It was well built of
heavy timbers, the materials having been brought from Vladivostock
five years before. It cost about fifteen thousand dollars, I believe,
and was warm and comfortable. The baron had an excellent chef and we
enjoyed a substantial breakfast, which in almost no time after our
arrival had been prepared for us. Then the baron’s own physician,
Doctor Golovkoff, who had been with him through the Russo-Japanese
War, looked after my legs and throat. He took me under his especial
care during my stay and had me in pretty good condition by the time I
left.

It was a pleasure for me to find myself once more in a comfortable
home. The baroness was spending the winter visiting her relatives in
Russia but the numerous touches of a feminine hand were unmistakable
throughout the establishment.

At Emma Harbor I met Mr. Thompson, who had a trading-store there.
Born on the Baltic, he had been a sea-faring man in his earlier
days, serving in German, French and English ships, and could speak
English very well. He told me that Captain Pederson had been in the
neighborhood with his new ship, the _Herman_, and through him I got a
Chukch to take a letter to the captain, telling him where I was and
asking him if it would be possible for him to call for me and take me
across to the American shore.

Mr. Caraieff had a brother at Indian Point and the latter came over
from his trading-station there to see us. He stayed a day or two and
when he went home he took a letter for Captain Pederson. I sent out
several other letters by Chukches to catch Captain Pederson and, in
this way, the news of my desire to get in touch with him spread among
the natives along the coast.




CHAPTER XXVIII

IN TOUCH WITH THE WORLD AGAIN


On the morning of May 19 an Eskimo whom we had sent over to John
Holland Bay came back and said that the _Herman_ had been there, but
had left for Cape Bering, so I sent word there to see if I could catch
the captain. While he was on his way there, however, he heard through
the natives of my being at Emma Harbor and on the afternoon of the
twenty-first I was delighted to see the _Herman_ come steaming in.

I did not need to be told that she was there for me and went aboard at
once. The captain greeted me hospitably and made no demur when I told
him how anxious I was to be set ashore at Nome as soon as possible. I
cannot express too strongly my warm appreciation of the kindness of the
captain and his crew, for it meant a considerable delay in his trading
voyage and consequent loss to the men who, according to the established
custom, were working entirely on shares. He told me that ever since he
had been on this coast the weather had been bad. He had got the natives
aboard again and again, to trade with them, only to have the wind
spring up and make it necessary for him to up-anchor with all speed and
put to sea again.

I bade good-by to the baron and to my other kind friends at Emma Harbor
and we started for Alaska. The distance across Bering Sea at that point
is about 240 miles. When we reached the edge of the ice off Nome on
the twenty-fourth we found that we could not steam in near enough to
the land for me to get ashore. There was nothing to do but to lie off
shore about twelve miles and hope for the ice to break up enough to
enable the ship to be worked in nearer the town. There is no harbor at
Nome; it is simply an open shore, unsafe for vessels in any kind of
bad weather, and conditions have to be exactly right before a ship can
venture in. For three days we lay there, while my patience underwent a
severe test; all I could do was to read the magazines and gaze at the
shore, twelve miles away.

Finally, during the afternoon of the twenty-seventh the captain decided
to go to St. Michael’s, and we got under way again and steamed across
Norton Sound. Early the next morning we arrived off St. Michael’s, but
on account of thick fog had to anchor and wait. At six P. M. the fog
lifted and we steamed in to a point about a mile off shore. The harbor
ice was still frozen solid, but we got out a boat and rowed to the edge
of the ice and then made our way ashore on foot. It was about eight
o’clock in the evening when, with a feeling of great relief, I set foot
at last on American soil. Captain Pederson had given me some American
clothing to take the place of the furs I had been wearing for so many
months. He accompanied me to the wireless station, but when we got
there we found that the office was closed.

We walked on in the direction of the town of St. Michael’s and on our
way I was overjoyed to meet Hugh J. Lee, the United States Marshal. I
had met him in Nome the previous summer, which was the first time I had
seen him since 1896. He had been with Peary on his Greenland ice-cap
trip in 1892 and had been on the _Hope_ in 1896 when she touched in
at Turnavick on the Labrador, my father’s fishing-station, where I
was spending a summer vacation. He was astonished to see me in St.
Michael’s and wanted to know what on earth I was doing there. A few
brief explanations put him in touch with the situation and I felt that
I was in the hands of a good friend.

[Illustration: THE NEWS OF CAPTAIN BARTLETT’S ARRIVAL AT ST. MICHAEL’S
REACHES NOME]

Lee took me to the agent of the Northern Commercial Company, which
has a large trading-house at St. Michael’s, and I was given a good
room in the winter hotel where the company’s employees are quartered.
The summer hotel was closed. Lee and I sat up until late that night,
talking over the _Karluk’s_ drift and the subsequent adventures of
our ship’s company.

Early the next morning I was at the office of the wireless, which is a
military station of the Signal Corps of the United States Army. I had
very little money and as he had to follow the regulations the sergeant
in charge refused to send my message to Ottawa unless I could pay
for it. This was an unexpected obstacle. I had travelled a good many
hundred miles to reach this spot and I am afraid that I almost lost my
patience with the red tape that could stand in the way of a message
that had to be sent. About that time Lee came in and explained matters,
and the sergeant finally concluded to send the message, which I had
written:

  ST. MICHAEL’S, ALASKA,
  May 29, 1914.

  _Naval Service, Ottawa, Canada_:

 _Karluk_ ice pressure sank January 11, sixty miles north Herald
 Island. Preparation made last fall leave ship therefore comfortable on
 ice. January twenty-first sent first and second mate two sailors with
 supporting party three months provisions Wrangell Island. Supporting
 party returned leaving them close Herald Island. They expected land
 island when ice moved in shore. February fifth Mackay, Murray,
 Beuchat, Sailor Morris left us using man power pull sledges. Sent
 again Herald Island three sledges, twenty dogs, pemmican, biscuit,
 oil. Open water prevented their landing. Saw no signs men, presumed
 they gone Wrangell. Returning left provisions along trail. Shortly
 after their return east gale sent us west. February twenty-fourth I
 left camp. March twelfth landed Munro, Williamson, Malloch, McKinlay,
 Mamen, Hadley, Chafe, Templeman, Maurer, Breddy, Williams, Eskimo
 family Wrangell eighty-six days’ supplies each man.

 March seventeenth Munro two men fourteen dogs left for supplies
 Shipwreck Camp. Plenty of driftwood game island. March eighteenth I
 left island Eskimo landed Siberia fifty miles west Cape North. May
 twenty-first Captain Pederson Whaler _Herman_ called for me Emma
 Harbor going out of his way whaling to do so. Soundings meteorological
 observations dredging kept up continually. Successful. Twelve hundred
 fathoms animal life found bottom.

 Need funds pay bills contracted Siberia and here. Wire Northern
 Commercial Company, San Francisco, five hundred dollars. Instruct them
 forward by wire St. Michael’s.

  BARTLETT, CAPTAIN, C. G. S.

My own special task was done. The responsibility for what remained to
be done would be shared with others; means must be devised for the
rescue of the men on Wrangell Island.




CHAPTER XXIX

WAITING


The days following my arrival at St. Michael’s were busy ones for me.
My immediate problem was to see what ships were available to make the
voyage to Wrangell Island when navigation opened. Not until midsummer
would conditions be right, and even then, as we had found in the
_Karluk_, the time of open water was likely to be brief and might be
cut short at any moment. I received many messages—from my family in
Newfoundland, from my friends in Boston and elsewhere, from the press
and from the authorities in Ottawa. I even had a telegram from the
advertising department of an enterprising American periodical: “Please
wire our expense permission to use your picture smoking pipe for
tobacco advertisement. What brand do you smoke?”

From Ottawa I received a message expressing the relief of the
authorities at news of the _Karluk_—which, I found, had been generally
given up for lost, with all on board—and asking for advice and details
regarding arrangements for the rescue of the men and the time when
ice conditions would allow their being taken off the island. To this
inquiry I replied:

  ST. MICHAEL’S, ALASKA,
  May 30, 1914.

  _Hon. G. J. Desbarats,
  Naval Service, Ottawa, Canada._

 Russian ice-breakers _Taimir_ and _Vaigatch_ soon make annual
 exploring trip north coast Siberia. Strongly advise you try arrange
 Russian Government these vessels relieve men. Vessels wintered
 Vladivostock but may have already left for north. Failing this
 arrangement another Russian ice-breaker _Nadjeshny_ lying idle
 Vladivostock might be obtained. Another chance United States revenue
 cutter _Bear_ now in Bering Sea. Possible arrangements United States
 Government. If _Bear_ goes should seek convoy Russian ice-breakers. No
 other available vessels these waters. My opinion July or early August
 before ice breaks up around Wrangell though seasons differ. Plenty
 bird other animal life island good Eskimo hunter should not suffer
 food. I want go relief ships. Russian ships have wireless can get in
 touch with them if already at sea.

  BARTLETT, CAPTAIN.

The _Bear_, as I have mentioned before, had been one of the ships to
rescue the survivors of the Greely expedition thirty years before. I
had never made a trip in her but I knew what kind of ship she was.
Built in Scotland in the seventies for the Newfoundland seal-fisheries,
she was considered a crack sealer for that period and made many
successful voyages. In 1883 the United States Government was fitting
out an expedition under Commander Schley to go to the Arctic to relieve
Greely and his men. The _Bear_ and the _Thetis_ were all ready to leave
St. John’s for their sealing trips, with their crews and outfits all
arranged for. They were just the ships for the purpose and the United
States Government bought them, paying, besides a liberal price for the
vessels themselves, the amount of money that would have been shared
by their officers and men if they had made good sealing trips. Many
people, I have discovered, have supposed that the ships were given by
England; what led to this supposition was the fact that Queen Victoria
gave the United States the _Alert_, which, with the Nares Expedition,
had spent the winter of 1875-6 at Floe-Berg Beach, Grant Land, somewhat
south of our winter quarters at Cape Sheridan in the _Roosevelt_ in the
winters of 1905-6 and 1908-9. Will Norman, a relative of mine, from my
own town of Brigus, Newfoundland, went as ice-pilot of the _Thetis_,
on her voyage for the Greely survivors, and Captain Ash, from Trinity
Bay, Newfoundland, who afterwards for many years was master of the Red
Cross boats, plying between St. John’s and New York, was ice-pilot of
the _Bear_. With the quality of the ship in mind, and her past record,
to say nothing of her present work in Alaskan waters, I felt no doubt
that the _Bear_ would get through to Wrangell Island if any ship could
do so. I had been told, too, that her master, Captain Cochran, was not
afraid to put her in the ice, for he had served under that fearless
and true-hearted man, the late Captain Jarvis. On the whole, it seemed
to me that it would be a matter of singular interest for the _Bear_
to rescue the _Karluk_ survivors as she had rescued the Greely party
thirty years before, on the other side of the continent.

The Russian ships, _Taimir_ and _Vaigatch_, also, had fine records. I
have already mentioned the success of Captain Vilkitski in the _Taimir_
in discovering Nicholas II Land in 1913. I knew that both vessels were
similar to the steel ships used in the Newfoundland seal-fisheries and
that they were able craft, equipped with powerful engines.

During my stay in St. Michael’s I was fortunate in having the skilful
treatment of Doctor Fernbaugh, the government surgeon, so that I soon
got around again. He was very good to me, making me feel at home and
treating me like a brother. The boys at the wireless station were kind
enough to give me the back files to read, so that I could get an idea
of what had been happening in the world. The agents of the Northern
Commercial Company, too, were most hospitable and treated me as one of
their own.

When I first reached St. Michael’s, the _Bear_, coming up from San
Francisco, was about due in Nome, to bring the mail and take up her
regular summer work, the first ship from the “outside” to reach
Nome that year. On account of the ice around Nome and the delay
of the mail-boat _Victoria_ from Seattle, which ordinarily would
have brought the mail from Nome to St. Michael’s, the _Bear_ came
in to St. Michael’s and landed the mail there. I went on board and
Captain Cochran and his officers talked over the plight of the men on
Wrangell Island with me and expressed a desire to go to the island and
rescue the men. At this time they had not received instructions from
Washington regarding the trip, but not long afterwards, while they
were on their way over to the Siberian coast, their orders came by
wireless to go to the island and to take me with them. It was while the
_Bear_ was at St. Michael’s that I first made the acquaintance of Lord
William Percy, the son of the Duke of Northumberland. He was making
a summer cruise in the _Bear_ to study the ducks of Alaskan waters.
He was a master of his subject. My first meeting with him was down in
the ’tween-decks of the _Bear_, in a corner among boxes and barrels,
surrounded by various kinds of knives, scissors and the other gear
necessary to mount birds. He gave me welcome messages from friends
of mine whom he had met in Boston and New York. Later on I was with
him on many of his ornithological expeditions and learned a good deal
about ducks from him. He could tell at a glance the sex and species of
a bird; to the average man, even to many a fairly experienced hunter,
a duck is a duck. On the _Bear_ I found another ornithologist, an
enthusiast named Hershey, who left us later on and went over to the
mouth of the Yukon.

The latter part of June I went over to Nome to wait for the _Bear_. I
was feeling better all the time, and looked forward to being on my way
to Wrangell Island before many weeks.

At Nome I was the guest of Mr. Japhet Linderberg, mine-owner and
operator, who in many ways might be called the Cecil Rhodes of Alaska.
There was no limit to his kindness and generosity to me. Though he has
made a fortune in gold-mining he works as hard as ever and attends
personally to a vast number of details. The forty-two-mile ditch-line
that conveys water to his sluices is the result of an idea of his own
and he still gives it his personal attention, going over it frequently
to see that everything is all right. The season is short in Nome and
the expense of mining is great; whatever is to be done must be done
between the middle of June and the middle of September, and without
water very little could be done at all.

On several of his inspection-trips over the line I had the pleasure of
accompanying him. On one occasion we were joined by Major MacManus,
with whom I had come over by motor-boat from St. Michael’s; the major
was on an inspection tour among the army posts, a typical soldier of
the very best type, alert, vigorous and a great companion. I believe
he could ride a horse forever without getting tired. On this occasion
he rode a horse belonging to Mr. Linderberg, who rode his own favorite
mount, while I rode a horse from the army post. It was a typical
northern summer day, with bright sunshine and not a breath of air
stirring. The slopes of the distant mountains were green, and their
jagged peaks, with crowns of perpetual snow, stood out brilliantly
against the clear, blue sky, while in the distance was the blue haze
that I have seen so many times in the mountains of New England in the
early fall before the leaves begin to turn. As we were riding along we
came to a bend and Mr. Linderberg got off his horse to see how deep the
water was at this particular place. My saddle-girths were slack, so,
while we were waiting for Mr. Linderberg to complete his calculations,
I dismounted and began to tighten them. I had my pipe with me, so I
filled it and lighted up. While I was doing this the others started on
their way; I finished lighting my pipe, mounted my horse and started
after them.

There were many turns in the path and as they were trotting along I
soon lost sight of them. I was enjoying myself, however, and let my
horse walk along at his leisure, while I let my eyes wander gratefully
over the scene before me; no sound was to be heard but the singing of
the birds. I just gave the horse his head and sat or lolled in the
saddle, smoking and day-dreaming.

I was rudely recalled from dreamland by something altogether realistic,
a wheelbarrow which was turned bottom-up on the path. The horse saw
it before I did, evidently, and was so violently prejudiced against
it that he tried at once to avoid it, without considering whether I
disliked wheelbarrows or not, for the first thing I knew I was in the
icy waters of the ditch, which at that point was six or eight feet
deep. My cap floated away at once, but I kept my pipe in my mouth and
when I came to the surface still had it.

I was soon out of the water, of course, and then was seized with an
uncontrollable fit of laughter. I just stood and laughed and laughed
and laughed again. The horse ran only a short distance and then stopped
and waited for me. I took off my clothes and wrung them out; when I
put them on again, remounted and started along the path, I felt quite
warm and dry before long, at least on the left side where the sunshine
pelted down. I did not hurry the horse but let him walk along slowly
until, by the time I came up with the others, I looked dry enough on my
port side.

The major heard me laughing as I came near them and wondered quite
naturally what was the matter with me to be so uncontrollably mirthful,
but I kept my right side carefully turned away from them and they were
none the wiser. Again and again, as we rode along, I would go off into
a fit of laughter until finally, when we dismounted at the house of
one of the men who looked after the ditch-line, I took pity on their
curiosity and told them what had happened to me.

It was now about midnight and the sun had just set behind the mountain
peaks so Mr. Linderberg said that we would do a little trout-fishing.
We started out and I was eager to see what luck we should have but in a
very short time I completely lost interest in the sport, the mosquitoes
were swarming about us in such clouds. They were large, well-built and
utterly unterrified by any word or act on my part, though I am not
conscious of omitting any, and the Recording Angel was busy for a short
time. It was only for a short time, however, for, though my companions
were apparently untroubled and even took a curious kind of pleasure in
my struggles, I was glad to acknowledge myself beaten by the far-famed
Alaska mosquito. I was literally a sight, my face, neck and hands red
and swollen the next morning, whereas the major and my host showed no
evidences that there had been any mosquitoes in their neighborhood.

In the mountainous country near Nome there are often sudden showers,
accompanied by very high winds, so whenever we were out riding we
always carried our oilskins strapped behind our saddles. On one of our
rides we saw a storm coming up but hoped that it would pass us by; the
tail-end of it struck us, however, with a deluge of rain and a high
wind. I had not bothered to get off my horse to put on my coat and when
the storm was upon us I unloosed the coat from behind my saddle and
started to put it on. Just as I got my arms in the sleeves the wind
took it and whirled it out into a kind of balloon. This frightened the
horse and he turned suddenly around and started for the water. Then
he as suddenly changed his mind and tore madly down over the outside
edge of the embankment while my arms were seesawing back and forth as
I tried to get them through the coatsleeves. After a while I managed
to get one arm out, holding on by gripping my knees to the horse’s
body, and as the horse started for some low trees I slid off without
a scratch, though I did not deserve any such luck. The others came up
very much disturbed, for they were sure that I would fall off among the
boulders and be killed.

The time that I spent at Nome, though I was naturally very anxious for
the moment to come when we should be on our way to get the men on the
island, was made to pass pleasantly by the many good friends whom I
made there. I lived at the Golden Gate Hotel but took my meals at the
Log Cabin Club. The club had a Japanese chef named Charlie, who was
really a wonder; one dined as well there as at any good hotel in San
Francisco. The club is the great meeting-place in Nome and many were
the lively political discussions we had there.

I could fill a book with descriptions of the interesting people I
met in Nome. There was Doctor Neuman, a great student of the Alaskan
Eskimo, and the author of important books about them, and more than
that a man who has done them a great deal of good and is greatly
beloved by them. There was Jim Swartzwell, the proprietor of the Golden
Gate Hotel, a typical, open-hearted, Alaskan sour-dough; no man or
woman ever came to him for assistance and went away empty-handed.
I saw the house where Rex Beach lived in Nome and met the originals
of many of the characters in his stories, who were some of them
story-books in themselves.




CHAPTER XXX

OFF FOR WRANGELL ISLAND


From time to time there came rumors of how close the season was and how
much ice there was about the coast. This was disquieting. I had told
the captains of the vessels that from time to time left Nome for the
northern waters, walrus-hunting or trading, about the men on Wrangell
Island and had asked them, if they got anywhere near the island, to
take a look around. By the first week in July I began to get more and
more uneasy and anxious to get started. The _Bear_ had been in the
north and reported on her return that the ice was heavy and still
closely packed, and the walrus-hunter _Kit_ came back from north of
Bering Strait with the same story. Such news was not at all reassuring,
though I knew that the ice could be broken up in a few hours’ time just
as it could form in an equally short interval. The tenth of August, I
reckoned, should see us at Wrangell Island; the men would not really be
expecting me much before that time.

The _Bear_ finally got away, with me on board, on July 13. She had a
number of calls to make on her way north, for in addition to being
the mail-boat, she had to bring help to the needy, act as a kind of
travelling law-court, carry school-teachers and missionaries around
from place to place and make herself generally useful. It was a great
relief to me to be really doing something at last, after so many
weeks of inaction. My thoughts were constantly on the castaways and I
wondered how things had been going with them since the middle of March.

We had a pleasant ship’s company. I slept in the captain’s cabin.
On the port side in a hammock was the Reverend Doctor Hoar, who was
accompanying us as far as his mission station at Point Hope. In another
hammock was Mr. Shields, the Alaskan Superintendent of Education, an
able young man who has done wonders with the means at his disposal to
foster the spirit of thrift among the Eskimo in their reindeer-herding.
He knows every nook and cranny from Nome to Point Barrow and has won
the respect and admiration of the Eskimo everywhere. On the starboard
side were Hershey and E. Swift Train, who was taking motion-pictures
and gathering material for the use of schools.

Just across the way was the wardroom and a finer set of men than the
officers of the _Bear_ I never met. They had the latchstring always
out. I was privileged to visit the chart-room at any time and had the
rare opportunity of learning from Lieutenant Dempwolf, the navigating
officer, much about Alaskan and Siberian waters. It was fine to feel
a good ship like the _Bear_ under one and worth while seeing others
navigate. A lot of merchant-marine men would be greatly benefited by a
trip on a revenue-cutter.

Our first stop was Reindeer Station at St. Lawrence Island. Then we
went to other stations on St. Lawrence Island, with supplies for the
schools there, and then on to St. Lawrence Bay on the Siberian coast,
to Lütke Island. From there we went to Emma Town and picked up Lord
Percy, who had been collecting birds at Lütke Island and had come up
with a native in a skin-boat. At Emma Town I again met the Mr. Caraieff
who had taken me to Emma Harbor; his brother had gone to Vladivostock.
Here I paid the money I owed. Some of the dogs I had left were still
here but only two of them were any good; the others were still not
rested enough to be of use. They were offered me again but I told my
kind friends to keep them if they could get any good out of them. When
I had been there before the snow had been piled high over everything.
How different it all looked on this beautiful July afternoon! When Lord
Percy had picked up his things at Emma Town we steamed along the coast
to East Cape, and then to Ugelen, near by. From here we went across to
Teller, on the Alaskan coast, and visited various settlements.

At Reindeer Station, at Port Clarence, I met again the Reverend Mr.
Brevick, the missionary in charge, whom I had met the previous year
when we were there in the _Karluk_; he again treated me royally.
We waited here while Mr. Shields and Lieutenant Dempwolf, in the
steam-launch, visited some of the settlements farther up the bay.

It was while we were in Kotzebue Sound on August 4 that we heard over
the wireless that war had been declared between Germany and France and
then between Germany and England. It may be imagined what an effect
such an amazing piece of news, coming to us in such a detached way in
so remote a corner of the world, had upon us; at first, of course, we
had difficulty in believing it, but there seemed to be no doubt of
its accuracy, so Lord Percy, who was an officer in the British army,
left us to get back to England as soon as possible. I have heard from
him since of his life in the trenches. He is one of the many men of
the “nobility and gentry” who have uncomplainingly done their duty
for their country. Mr. Shields went ashore at Kotzebue with Lord
Percy, for somewhere in the vicinity he was to establish a new Eskimo
village. We went on to Point Hope, where Doctor Hoar left us.

At Point Hope I again met Kataktovick, who had been brought over from
East Cape by Captain Pederson in the _Herman_. I paid him his wages, as
a member of the _Karluk_ expedition, and gave him a complete outfit of
clothing which the Canadian Government was providing for each man of
the party. He would have liked to go with us on the trip to Wrangell
Island, if it had been possible. He was feeling well, he said, and from
the looks of things seemed about to be married.

From Point Hope we headed for Point Barrow. Off Icy Cape we met the
first ice and from there on it was a constant fight to make our way
along; evidently it was not an open season. Accompanying us were the
_King and Winge_, a walrus-hunter and trader, managed by Mr. Olaf
Swenson, and a Canadian schooner, loaded with supplies for the mounted
police at Herschel Island. The schooner had a big deckload and was
very heavy in the water. She was not sheathed and had no stem-plates,
and was evidently not at all adapted for ice work. In fact, it seemed
doubtful to me whether she ever would reach Point Barrow. The _King and
Winge_, on the other hand, was just in the right ballast for bucking
the ice; besides being small, she was short for her beam and was quick
to answer the helm.

The ice through which we were making our toilsome way was not so heavy
as it was closely packed. It was great to see the good old _Bear_
charging and recharging, twisting and turning; being heavy in the water
she was able, with her great momentum, to smash off points and corners
of the ice and make her way through it. I should have been delighted to
be in the crow’s-nest, for steering such a ship through the ice is not
unlike driving a big automobile through a crowded thoroughfare; this
time, however, I was a passenger.

Near Wainwright Inlet we found a large four-masted schooner ashore. The
_Bear_ tried in vain to get her off; she was fast aground and heavily
loaded. The only thing that could be done was to take her cargo out of
her. While we were standing by, the ice began to close in and we had to
turn round and steam south in a hurry, leaving our big line with the
schooner. When we got back again some days later she had been floated
all right.

We reached Point Barrow on the evening of the twenty-first of August.
Here I found McConnell, who had come in a small schooner from the
eastward. He told me all about what had happened to Stefansson after
the _Karluk_ had been blown offshore by the storm which began her
drift in the September of the previous year.

The party that left the _Karluk_ on September 20, 1913, as I have
related before, consisted of Stefansson, Jenness, Wilkins, McConnell
and the two Eskimo boys who had come aboard at Point Hope, Panyurak and
Asatshak. They had with them two sledges and twelve dogs and equipment
sufficient for the purpose which took them ashore, a two weeks’ caribou
hunt in the country back of Beechey Point to provide the ship’s company
with needed fresh meat for the winter, which it seemed likely would be
spent with the ship frozen in at that point. It took them, McConnell
said, two days to work their way in over the ice to one of the Jones
Islands, about six miles northwest of Beechey Point. When they finally
reached the island they found that the ice between them and the
mainland was not safe for travelling, so while they were waiting for
it to freeze more solidly, Stefansson decided to send him and Asatshak
back to the _Karluk_ for some things they wanted.

That night, however, the storm that sent us drifting off shore came up
and it was clearly not safe for them to go out on the sea-ice for the
present. At the end of the three days’ storm the sea was clear on the
outside and the ship was nowhere to be seen. Whether she was free at
last and on her way eastward towards Herschel Island or had been blown
westward into the waters north of Point Barrow they did not know. It
was impossible for them to get ashore until the twenty-eighth, when
they reached Beechey Point. They stayed in this vicinity for several
days and Stefansson did a little caribou hunting without success. The
Eskimo became alarmed because there was not a larger amount of food,
for they were civilized Eskimo and unused to living off the country,
so finally on the third of October the party started westward towards
Point Barrow. They made the march of 175 miles in nine days.

They stayed at Point Barrow for some time to procure fur clothing
and provisions for the party, as well as a sledge and a dog-team. On
November 8 they started east again. The latter part of the month they
reached Cape Halkett, where they met an experienced Eskimo hunter
named Angupkanna, otherwise called “the Stammerer,” who told them that
early in October he saw a ship in the ice off shore and through his
telescope could see her distinctly. Stefansson was sure that she was
the _Karluk_, a ship with which the Eskimo was well acquainted from
her whaling days. Angupkanna told them that he watched her for three
or four hours and then fog settled down for three days, at the end of
which time he saw her no more.

Leaving Jenness at Cape Halkett to make some ethnological studies,
Stefansson, Wilkins and McConnell went on to the east once more and
the middle of December reached Flaxman Island, where they found
Leffingwell, who had come up on the _Mary Sachs_ to finish some work
he had begun the year before. He was wintering alone, though an Eskimo
family was living not far away from him.

Leaving Leffingwell on December 14, they reached the winter quarters of
the southern party at Collinson Point, thirty miles to the eastward,
on the evening of the same day. Here they spent the winter. Stefansson
made a journey later on still farther to the east with a member of
the southern party to Herschel Island and Fort Mackenzie, to make
plans for the journey which he was to undertake in the spring over
the ice to the north of Martin Point in search of new land. In the
latter part of February McConnell made a trip to Point Barrow for the
mail, returning to Martin Point not long after Stefansson, with a
party of seven men, had started north over the ice on March 22. With
a companion McConnell overtook them the next day and they travelled
on for more than two weeks, until, on April 6 they reached the edge
of the continental shelf, discovered by Mikkelson and Leffingwell in
the _Duchess of Bedford_ expedition in 1907. At this point Stefansson
sent the supporting party back, and went on to the northward with six
dogs, a sledge and forty days’ supplies, together with two rifles and
360 rounds of ammunition. He had with him two companions, Storker
Storkerson, who had been mate of the _Duchess of Bedford_ and had
been living as a hunter and trapper at various places along the shore
since the date of the Mikkelson expedition, and Ole Anderson, another
experienced man. Stefansson intended to go on for fifteen days’ march
before turning back and hoped to do by ice travel what the _Karluk_
had been prevented from doing—to discover new land along the 141st
Meridian.[1] Stefansson had not since been heard from, McConnell said,
but there should be plenty of bear and seal for his party to subsist on
and it was likely that in any event they could make their way to Banks
Land.

[Footnote 1: Stefansson was successful in his quest for new land and,
in 1915 and 1916, reported his discoveries.]

[Illustration: THE CAMP AT RODGERS HARBOR, WRANGELL ISLAND

“Following their instructions to divide into smaller parties, for
general harmony and larger hunting areas, Mamen, Malloch and Templeman
... went down ... to Rodgers Harbor. Here they erected a tent.” _See
page 319_]

At Point Barrow, too, in the _Bear_ we found several shipwrecked crews
waiting for a chance to go south. We landed the mails and the various
other things we had brought for the station there and then, finding
that, as I have related, the schooner that we had found aground had
floated, we headed at last for Wrangell Island. I was becoming more and
more anxious to get there and hoped that meanwhile the Russian ships
or one of the walrus-hunting boats had been there and taken off the
men. It was getting late and before many weeks the ice might close in
around the island and render it inaccessible to a ship, but it was not
altogether this danger alone that worried me but also the feeling that
the longer the men were kept on the island the greater would be their
suspense and the harder it would be for them to keep up their spirits.
Of course, until some one came to rescue them they would not know
whether I had ever succeeded in reaching the Siberian coast or not.
Every day of this suspense must be telling on them and bringing them
face to face with the thought that they might have to spend another
winter on the island, an experience which would be likely to kill them
all. So altogether these days had been nightmares to me, the more so
because naturally under the circumstances I was not in a position to
do anything to hasten matters. The _Bear_ had her own work to do, of
course, and only a limited season to do it in. My feeling of relief at
being at last on the way to the goal of all my thought and effort may
be imagined.

We left on August 28, with a fresh north-north-east wind behind us, and
straightened her out for Rodgers Harbor. The harder it blew the better
I liked it, for our voyage would be so much the quicker. The only
thing I was afraid of was that we might get thick fog or snow and be
delayed indefinitely.

On the afternoon of the twenty-fourth we met the ice, large loose
pieces similar to the ice I had seen off the southern end of the island
on my way across with Kataktovick. The weather became hazy and then
we had the fog that I was fearing. All the square sails were taken in
and we slowly steamed to the northwest. At eight P.M. the engines were
stopped and the ship was headed east half south. During the afternoon
countless birds were seen, denoting the proximity of land; it seemed as
if we must soon be there. During the next day the ship worked slowly
towards the island again and at ten A.M. we met a lot more large, loose
ice. We were now between fifteen and twenty miles from the island and
if the fog had lifted should have been there in a short time and had
the men off. We had about ninety tons of coal in the bunkers. All day
long on the twenty-fifth it was thick, but we could see a mile or so
ahead and were still going along easily, just keeping the ship under
steerage-way. Finally, at eight o’clock in the evening, the engines
were stopped, the ship was hove hull to and allowed to drift. The next
day the wind had hauled to the north-northwest and sent us drifting
away from the island, towards the Siberian shore. At 4.12 A. M. on the
morning of the twenty-seventh, Captain Cochran decided to go back to
Nome for a new supply of coal. My feelings at this moment can be easily
imagined. The days that followed were days to try a man’s soul. In
fact, until the final rescue of the men, I spent such a wretched time
as I had never had in my life.

We did not return directly to Nome but called at Cape Serdze to make
an attempt to find out about a missing boat owned by Dr. Hoar, which
had broken away from Point Hope the previous fall. Mr. Wall was away.
I went ashore with Lieutenant Dempwolf and tried to find out whether
the Russian ships had been to Wrangell Island. I learned from Corrigan
that a Russian ship had passed west but that he had not seen her coming
back; it turned out that she had gone up to Koliuchin with coal and was
not one of the ice-breakers. I gave Corrigan some pipes and tobacco.

From Cape Serdze we went on to East Cape and I went ashore here to
see if I could learn anything about the Russian ice-breakers at Mr.
Caraieff’s. Mr. Carpendale told me that the report was that the
_Vaigatch_ had been within ten miles of Wrangell Island on August 4,
when she got a wireless message with news of the war and was ordered
south to Anadyr with the _Taimir_. I could only hope that when we
reached Nome, we should hear that some other ship had been to the
island and taken the men off.




CHAPTER XXXI

THE RESCUE FROM WRANGELL ISLAND


On August 30, at half past seven in the evening, we anchored off
Nome. Early the next morning a lighter came alongside with coal but a
fresh south-west wind sprang up while we were loading and we had to
put to sea, leaving about five tons of coal still aboard the lighter.
By eleven o’clock the wind had moderated and we were able to come
back to our anchorage again. I paid a call on Mr. Linderberg, who was
financially interested in the company supplying us with coal, and he
took pains to see that things were pushed forward as fast as possible.
Just before dark another gale sprang up and we were forced to put to
sea again. By noon the next day, September 2, it was safe for us to
return and the lighter was soon alongside. We finished with her by
four o’clock the next morning but on account of the fact that in the
blow several lighters loaded with coal had been driven aground on the
beach and the mail-boat _Victoria_, from Seattle, also had to discharge
freight and needed lighters, there was no other lighter of coal to take
the place of the one with which we had just finished.

I had luncheon with Mr. Linderberg. He was well aware of my extreme
uneasiness about the continued delay and told me that he had decided to
send the _Corwin_ to Wrangell Island after the men; she had formerly
been in the revenue cutter service and, as I have already noted, had
made an interesting trip to Wrangell in the early eighties. While
ashore to see Mr. Linderberg I ran across Mr. Swenson, of the _King and
Winge_, in Mr. Goggin’s store, a great rendezvous in Nome, and learned
from him that he was about to start for the Siberian coast on a trading
and walrus-hunting trip. I asked him, if he went anywhere near Wrangell
Island, to call and see if the men had been taken off and he promised
that he would do so. I sent a telegram to Ottawa to let the authorities
know that the _Corwin_ was going to try to reach the island and that
the _King and Winge_ would be in that vicinity, too, and would call
there if she could.

The _Bear_ finished her coaling at nine o’clock on the morning of the
fourth and then had to spend the next few hours taking on water. At
one o’clock an onshore wind sprang up and I went off to the ship. We
got away at ten minutes past two but spent all the next day at Port
Clarence, looking for water. I was feeling easier in my mind now
because I felt sure that Mr. Swenson would go straight to the island,
whether the _Bear_ ever got there or not.

Daylight on the sixth found us off Cape York. We were going along with
a fair wind and all sail set. Early in the afternoon we rounded East
Cape; so far we were doing well. The wind came dead ahead in the late
afternoon. By dark we were abreast of Cape Serdze. The next morning
the wind was north-northwest and the sea smooth, a thing which told us
clearly that the ice was near. All day long conditions remained the
same and at quarter of eight in the evening we were not surprised to
see the ice. We were 131 miles from Rodgers Harbor. We lay near the
edge of the ice and waited for daylight.

As soon as dawn broke September 8, we went on full speed ahead, through
the loose ice; some distance away, on our port bow, we could see that
the ice was close-packed. By early afternoon we had made more than
fifty miles and were about seventy-five miles from our goal. Luncheon
was just finished and I was standing in the chart-room, when we saw a
schooner dead ahead, running before the wind. The glasses were soon
trained on her and we saw that she was the _King and Winge_. I hoped
and was inclined to believe that she had been to the island, or she
would hardly be coming back so soon. Then I began to fear that perhaps
she had broken her propeller and was now taking advantage of the
favoring wind to put for Bering Strait and Alaska.

I watched her as she drew nearer and nearer; then she hove to and we
were soon alongside. I looked sharply at the men on her deck; her own
crew was fairly large, but soon I could pick out Munro and McKinlay and
Chafe, and of course the Eskimo family, and I knew that our quest was
over. A boat was lowered from the _Bear_, with Lieutenant Miller in
charge; I obtained permission from the captain to go along and was soon
on board the _King and Winge_, among the _Karluk_ party.

“All of you here?” was my first question.

McKinlay was the spokesman. “No,” he answered; “Malloch and Mamen and
Breddy died on the island.”

There was nothing to be said. I had not really expected to see the
mate’s party or the Mackay party, for I had long since ceased to
believe that there was any reasonable chance that they could have got
through to a safe place, but though it was hard to be forced to what
appeared the inevitable conclusion in their case, it was an especially
sad and bitter blow to learn that three of the men whom I had seen
arrive at Wrangell Island had thus reached safety only to die.

[Illustration: THE RESCUE OF THE PARTY AT WARING POINT, WRANGELL ISLAND

“The rescue, both here and at Rodgers Harbor, was effected just in
time.”]

None of the three could well be spared. Breddy had been a careful and
efficient worker in all the struggles we had gone through since the
storm had carried us away in the previous September. Mamen was a great
companion, indoors or out; he especially excelled in all athletic
sports that demanded fearlessness and endurance, and he was, besides
this, a devoted and helpful associate. At one time, in fact, I had
had it in mind to send him to the Siberian coast with Kataktovick in
my stead, if the injury to his knee-cap had not incapacitated him,
and, if he had been able to start on such a journey, I feel confident
that he would have made it or died in the attempt. Malloch was an
ideal man for an exploring expedition like ours, brought face to face
by circumstances with conditions that were calculated to test to the
utmost a man’s real nature, for he was not only fully equipped in his
own special field of science but beyond all that he was one of the
most self-sacrificing men with whom it has ever been my lot to be
thrown into intimate contact. If his task for the moment happened to be
something connected with his own work as a scientist, he performed it
as a matter of course, and if it happened to be sweeping the floor or
doing any other odd job that needed to be done, he did that equally as
a matter of course, without the slightest thought of self or any other
idea in mind except to be as useful as possible to his companions.

I shook hands all around with our party and then with Mr. Swenson
and Captain Jochimsen, the brave skipper of the _King and Winge_,
and thanked them in the name of the Canadian Government for rescuing
the men. Then I asked Mr. Swenson’s permission to have the _Karluk_
people transferred to the _Bear_. There they could receive the medical
attention that they needed, for there was no doctor on the _King and
Winge_; there was, too, no reason now why Mr. Swenson should not
continue the walrus-hunt that he had postponed to go to Wrangell Island
for the men of the _Karluk_. McConnell, also, who was on the _King and
Winge_, came on board the _Bear_ with the rest.

To get the whole party and their few possessions over to the _Bear_
took about an hour. Then we said good-by to the _King and Winge_ and
steamed in the direction of Herald Island to make a search for the
mate’s and the doctor’s parties, though there was no likelihood of
seeing any traces of them. At dark, owing to the ice, the engines were
kept working easy ahead; at eight o’clock the next morning, September
9, we were twelve miles from Herald Island. The ice kept us from
getting any nearer, and after we had done what we could to find a way
through, Captain Cochran decided to go back to Nome. Mr. Swenson had
already taken the _King and Winge_ as near Herald Island as he could
get, without seeing any signs of human life, and months before, shortly
after my departure with Kataktovick for Siberia, McKinlay and Munro had
made their way across the ice in the direction of Herald Island and had
got near enough to see that no one was there. Later on, as I afterwards
learned, the _Corwin_, on the trip on which, as he had promised, Mr.
Linderberg sent her, cruised all around Herald Island without seeing
any evidences that any one had been there. It was as certain as
anything could be that both parties had long since perished, but it was
very hard for me to give them up, men with whom I had spent so many
months, men with the future still before them.

From the vicinity of Herald Island, the _Bear_ headed for Cape Serdze
and at six o’clock the next morning we anchored off Mr. Wall’s place.
Mr. Wall was still away and we did not stop long but were soon steaming
down the coast on the way to our next stop, Cape Prince of Wales.

I did not attempt to press the men for an account of what had happened
on the island. They had been through a long period of suspense and were
entitled to a rest, so it seemed the kindest thing to let the story
come out spontaneously as time went on. McKinlay told me part of it
and gradually further details appeared, as they came out in general
conversation.

Kataktovick and I, as I have already related, left the island on March
18. The Munro party, starting the day before for Shipwreck Camp, made
their way with comparatively little difficulty over the ice until they
had crossed the great pressure-ridge that had held us up so long on the
way in. Not far on the other side they came to open water, so they had
to return to the island.

Various trips were afterwards made out on the ice, on one of which
Williams froze his great toe so badly that there was nothing to do but
to amputate it, to save the foot and possibly further complications.
Perhaps many people would have preferred to risk one danger at a time,
rather than be operated on with the means at hand. Williamson was
the surgeon; he had shown his natural deftness, as I have mentioned
before, by his care of Mamen’s dislocated knee-cap at Shipwreck Camp.
His instruments consisted of a pocket-knife and a pair of tin-shears.
Perhaps no more painful and primitive operation was ever performed in
the Arctic, though the whaling captains have frequently had to exercise
a rough and ready surgery, whether it was possible to live up to the
requirements of Listerism or not. Williamson did his work well, and
his patient did his part with rare grit, so that the result was a
success.

Following their instructions to divide into smaller parties, for
general harmony and larger hunting areas, Mamen, Malloch and Templeman
left the main party on Icy Spit and went down around the southeastern
shore of the island to Rodgers Harbor. Here they erected a tent and
planned to build a house of driftwood, a plan which on account of
circumstances they were never able to carry into effect. Towards the
end of May Malloch and Mamen became ill with nephritis and died,
Malloch first and Mamen only a few days later. Templeman was thus left
alone, until he was joined by Munro and Maurer, who stayed with him
until the rescue. They lived on birds’ eggs and seal and, later in the
summer, on some Arctic foxes which fortunately came their way.

During the early spring the party at Icy Spit were fortunate in killing
polar bear, which gave them fresh meat. As the season advanced they
moved down the coast to Waring Point, where they found conditions more
favorable for getting birds than on the barren levels of Icy Spit.
Here they pitched their tents again and took up a regular routine of
life. Hadley, McKinlay, Kerdrillo, Keruk and the two children occupied
one tent and Williamson, Chafe, Williams and Breddy the other. Breddy
accidentally shot himself later on, making the third death on the
island. Hadley and Kerdrillo hunted daily and as the season advanced
they were able to get seal and duck, which gave sufficient food after
the supplies that we had brought from Shipwreck Camp had become
exhausted the first week in June. It was never possible to get a very
large supply of food ahead at any one time, and as the summer wore
on and they heard nothing from me they faced the prospect of another
winter with misgivings. Hadley and Kerdrillo fashioned a rude Eskimo
kayak, by making a framework of driftwood and stretching sealskins over
it, and Kerdrillo made good use of this in hunting seal after the ice
had broken up.

[Illustration: MAKING THE KAYAK ON WRANGELL ISLAND

“Hadley and Kerdrillo fashioned a rude Eskimo kayak, by making a
framework of driftwood and stretching sealskins over it, and Kerdrillo
made good use of this in hunting seal after the ice had broken up.”]

Both at Rodgers Harbor and at Waring Point the anxiety as to the
possibility of our not having made a safe crossing to Siberia to bring
help increased as the time went on. It required no undue exercise of
the imagination on my part to realize the intense relief which the men
felt when, on the morning of the seventh of September, the sound of a
steam whistle came across the water to those in the tent at Rodgers
Harbor and the party from the _King and Winge_ came ashore. This party
included Mr. Swenson and members of his own force, together with Eskimo
walrus hunters, whom he had taken aboard at East Cape and who had
brought the rescue party ashore in their oomiak, and Burt McConnell,
who had come up on the _King and Winge_ from Nome. Reunited with these
other members of the original ship’s company, McConnell was now able to
tell them of his trip ashore with Stefansson in the previous September
and briefly how Kataktovick and I had fared in making our trip to
Siberia.

The rescuers helped the rescued to gather together the few possessions
of value or interest at the camp and then, leaving a notice for any
other ship that might come to see about the men, all hands were soon
on board the _King and Winge_, enjoying the luxury of a bath, clean
clothes and an ample breakfast. The tent was left standing as it was,
but the British flag that had flown so long at half-mast was taken with
the rescued men.

With the Rodgers Harbor party safe aboard, the _King and Winge_ steamed
to Waring Point. On account of the ice they were unable to get nearer
than two miles from shore. Swenson and his party, again accompanied by
McConnell, went towards the shore over the ice; Kerdrillo came out to
meet them. Escorted by him they covered the rest of the distance to the
shore, several of the others rushing out over the ice to meet them. It
was found that if it had not been for the snow-storm which was already
growing severe the whole party would have migrated that very day to
a point on the north side of the island where, if they had to stay
through another winter, as seemed not unlikely, they would have a fresh
supply of drift-wood to draw on. Their camp at Waring Point was in bad
shape. Their tents were wearing out, their food supply was scanty and
they had only forty rounds of ammunition left with which to provide
themselves with food during the coming winter. To save their cartridges
they had lived as far as possible on birds’ eggs, fish which they
caught through the ice and gulls which they obtained by angling for
them on the cliffs with hook and line, a form of bird-hunting without
a shot-gun. The rescue, both here and at Rodgers Harbor, was effected
just in time.

Leaving a message for whatever ship might follow them here, the Waring
Point party joined their companions from Rodgers Harbor on the _King
and Winge_ and the rescue was complete. The little Eskimo girl brought
on board the black cat which had already had so many vicissitudes that
it was a wonder that it had any of its nine lives still left to draw
on. Here, as at Rodgers Harbor, the tents were left standing. The party
brought with them the three surviving dogs,—all that were left out of
the twenty that were still living when we had started for Siberia—and
three puppies.

The _King and Winge_ steamed towards Herald Island, as I have
previously said, but though she kept alongshore for miles she was
prevented by the ice-floes from getting very near and finally, to make
sure not to be frozen in for the winter, Mr. Swenson decided to set
his course for Nome. The weary and anxious _Karluk_ survivors enjoyed
the food that was hospitably placed before them and the opportunity to
bathe and put on clean clothes. The beards that adorned their faces
came off and it was a greatly transformed company that I observed from
the deck of the _Bear_ the next afternoon.

We reached Nome on the _Bear_, September 13. Our arrival aroused great
excitement, even though shipwrecked mariners from the Arctic are not
altogether a novelty in Nome. The rescue was more than ordinarily a
matter of local interest and pride because of the number of men and
ships concerned in it that were well known all through that part of
Alaska.

The hospitality of the Alaskan is unstinted, as I had already had
occasion to find out, but it seemed to me best to keep the men on board
the _Bear_ for a day or two, for in their reduced state they would be
more than usually susceptible to contagious diseases. It would be the
irony of fate for them to survive six months of semi-starvation and
then fall victim to some ailment of the civilization to which they had
so longed to return. To walk in shoes again, too, after so many months
of wearing skin-boots, would be painful for a while. After a few days
however, they had improved so much that I let them go ashore; they
realized the necessity of being careful and had no trouble. Kerdrillo
and his family, too, went ashore at Nome, to start on their way home to
the North.

It was marvellous how quickly the men picked up in health and strength.
On account of frost-bite Chafe and Williams were under the doctor’s
care, though they were otherwise in good shape. The sickest man
was Templeman; he could not have survived many days longer. Munro,
McKinlay and Hadley, who was in his fifty-eighth year, were all in good
condition and would probably have lived through another winter.

We were in Nome until the nineteenth; on that day we headed for the
south, our first stop St. Michael’s. It seemed advisable to keep the
men on the _Bear_, instead of transferring them to any other vessel;
there were no mail-boats leaving for the “outside,” and the men were
warm and comfortable and well cared for. While on our way to St.
Michael’s we heard by wireless of the stranding of the _Corwin_ off
Cape Douglas; she was on her way from Wrangell Island to Nome, having
heard by her wireless that the men had been safely taken off. About
eight o’clock in the morning we came within sight of her. On account
of the broken bottom we could not get nearer than a half mile from
her, so a boat was lowered and the third lieutenant went on board. The
_Bear_ lent some of her crew to help lighten the _Corwin_; then we went
on to the reindeer settlement at Port Clarence for water. Late in the
afternoon on the twenty-third we reached the _Corwin_ again and our men
were returned to us; she was floated a short time later.

[Illustration:

 _Photograph copyright, 1914, by Lomen Bros., Nome_

  Munro      Hadley      Captain      Keruk      McKinlay      Chafe      Williams
        Williamson      Bartlett      Helen
  Templeman      Mugpi      Kerdrillo      Maurer

THE _KARLUK_ SURVIVORS ON BOARD THE _BEAR_]

The next day we returned to Nome to get the Eskimo who belonged on King
Island. They had come to Nome in their large skin-boats a month or two
earlier to sell the great variety of articles that they are in the
habit of carving from the tusks of the walrus; it is really remarkable
what they can carve in this way: ships, cribbage-boards, houses,
models of men, women and children, etc. The deck of the _Bear_ had the
appearance of the first of May—moving day. These Eskimo had come to
Nome, of course, in the summer; now the season was getting late and the
weather was variable, so that they did not want to take any chances.
And, indeed, why should they? The _Bear_ was there and the wires were
tapped to Washington; furthermore, Nome did not care to have a couple
of hundred Eskimo on its hands during the winter, so the easiest way
out of the difficulty was to get the _Bear_ to take them aboard and
carry them to their home at King Island, seventy miles away. When we
reached there we found that the Eskimo lived in clefts in the rocky
cliffs; they were cliff-dwellers. It was a dreary view that met our
eyes that cold, windy September morning, but the Eskimo were delighted
for to them it was home.

Leaving King Island we called at the school-master’s at St. Lawrence
Island, to leave mail and provisions from Nome. The latter were badly
needed, for short rations had been the order of the day for some time.
Steaming around the western end of the island through a smooth sea
under brilliant sunshine, we were at last definitely bound south.

With St. Matthew’s Island a-beam, the next morning, our wireless
reported that all the boats from the _Tahoma_ had been picked up; we
had heard the S. O. S. call from the _Tahoma_ a day or so before. As we
afterward learned, the _Cordova_, anchored in the roadstead at Nome,
had picked up the _Tahoma’s_ call and had gone to her assistance. The
_Tahoma_ had struck an uncharted shoal about a hundred miles south of
Agattu Island, one of the western Aleutians, and had become a total
loss. The officers and crew had reached land in the ship’s boats and
were picked up later by the _Cordova_ and the _Patterson_.

During the twenty-ninth we were held back by a strong southeast gale,
but the following day the wind moderated and on the morning of October
first we tied up at the dock at Unalaska, which at the present time is
the base where the revenue-cutters get their coal and other supplies.
The coal comes from Australia and costs twelve or thirteen dollars a
ton. The officer in charge of the station here was Captain Reynolds,
who had been a lieutenant on the _Corwin_ when she visited Herald
Island in the eighties; he read me his diary where he told about their
landing on the island and climbing to the top and said that no one
could live there and that it was accessible in only one place.

The _Bear_ had to stay at Unalaska for several days to have her boilers
overhauled. We passed the time in trout-fishing, chiefly, and also
climbed Ballyhoo, a thing which every officer in the revenue-cutter
service must do. There is a book placed at the summit and every one who
climbs the mountain has to sign his name in the book. I went up with
Lieutenants Barker and Dempwolf. Lieutenant Kendall and I had some good
ptarmigan-shooting in that vicinity.

While we were here McKinlay became ill and had to go to the Jesse Lee
Hospital, where he was soon restored to health. I was glad that he
was all right, for in circumstances calculated to show men in their
true colors I had formed a high opinion of his efficiency and courage.
One of the younger members of the expedition and a man of scholarly
disposition—he had been a teacher—he showed no lack of grit in an
emergency. In such careful transactions as the checking over and
dividing up of supplies, I found him of great assistance. He had a good
understanding of human nature—perhaps his experience as a schoolmaster
had given him that—and I relied on him to preserve harmony if any
question should arise among the different groups on Wrangell Island. In
all difficulties he was the cool and canny Scot. Of the six scientists
left on the _Karluk_ after the departure of Stefansson, McKinlay was
the sole survivor.

About this time the Revenue-cutter _Manning_ was sent to Scotch Cap,
Unimak Island, to bring back a lighthouse-keeper who was very ill. The
_Manning_ anchored off the lighthouse and sent a boat for the keeper.
There was a strong tide running but the boat reached the lighthouse
safely and started back with the keeper, when it was capsized and the
ship’s doctor was drowned. We all felt his loss keenly because we
had got well acquainted with him while the vessels had been in port
together.

At Unalaska I met Captain Miller, of the _Patterson_, the Coast and
Geodetic Survey boat, which had been doing a great deal of work that
season off the south entrance of the Unimak Pass. He was a very clever
man and as I was much interested in his work, we spent a good many
hours together; not so very many months later he was to be drowned on
the _Lusitania_, in the course of the war whose first unbelievable
rumblings we still scarcely heard.

On the afternoon of October 14, with the long homeward pennant flying,
we cast off from the pier at Unalaska and steamed south on the last leg
of the long journey we had travelled since the June day the year before
when we had first left for the north. The voyage south was uneventful
and on October 24, 1914, the _Bear_ landed us once more at the navy
yard at Esquimault.

The next day, under the instructions of the Canadian Government, I paid
off the men; soon they had started for their homes, while I left for
Ottawa to make my final report of the last voyage of the _Karluk_.


THE END



*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 74622 ***